FCC ID: AZ489FT3848 2-Way Portable Radio

 

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO XPR 7550 IS, XPR 7580e IS FULL KEYPAD PORTABLE RADIO USER GUIDE en-US fr-CA JULY 2020 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

@68009593001@

68009593001-BP English Supplier's Declaration of Conformity Supplier's Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 2000 Progress Pkwy, Schaumburg, IL. 60196 Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: XPR 7550 IS conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

2 1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-

ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. For country code selection usage (WLAN devices) NOTICE:

The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US models. Per FCC regula-

tion, all Wi-Fi products marketed in the US must be fixed to US operation channels only. English 3 English Contents Supplier's Declaration of Conformity.............................. 2 Important Safety Information........................................ 26 Notice to Users (FCC).................................................. 27 Notice to Users (Industry Canada)............................... 28 Software Version.......................................................... 29 Copyrights.................................................................... 30 Computer Software Copyrights.................................... 32 Radio Care................................................................... 33 Chapter 1: Introduction.................................................35 1.1 Icon Information...........................................35 1.2 Conventional Analog and Digital Modes......35 1.3 IP Site Connect............................................36 1.4 Capacity PlusSingle-Site........................... 37 1.5 Capacity PlusMulti-Site .............................37 2.5 Attaching the Universal Connector Cover... 41 2.6 Turning the Radio On.................................. 42 2.7 Adjusting the Volume...................................42 Chapter 3: Radio Controls............................................44 3.1 Using the 4Way Navigation Button............45 3.2 Using the Keypad........................................ 46 Chapter 4: WAVE......................................................... 49 4.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise........................49 4.1.1 Switching from Radio Mode to WAVE Mode........................................... 49 4.1.2 Making WAVE Group Calls............50 4.1.3 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Group Calls................................. 51 4.1.4 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Private Calls................................ 51 4.1.5 Switching from WAVE Mode to Radio Mode ........................................... 51 Chapter 2: Getting Started........................................... 39 Part I: Capacity Max..................................................... 53 2.1 Charging the Battery....................................39 5.1 Push-To-Talk Button....................................53 2.2 Attaching the Battery................................... 39 5.2 Programmable Buttons................................53 2.3 Attaching the Antenna................................. 40 5.3 Assignable Radio Functions........................ 53 2.4 Attaching the Belt Clip................................. 41 5.4 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions...... 56 4 5.8 Zone and Channel Selections..................... 66 5.9.2 Broadcast Call .............................. 75 5.5 Accessing Programmed Functions..............56 5.6 Status Indicators..........................................57 5.6.1 Icons.............................................. 57 5.6.2 LED Indicator................................. 63 5.6.3 Tones.............................................63 5.6.3.1 Audio Tones.....................64 5.6.3.2 Indicator Tones................ 64 5.7 Registration................................................. 64 5.8.1 Selecting Zones ............................ 66 5.8.2 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search............................................66 5.8.3 Selecting a Call Type.....................67 5.8.4 Selecting a Site..............................68 5.8.5 Roam Request...............................68 5.8.6 Site Lock On/Off............................ 69 5.8.7 Site Restriction...............................69 5.8.8 Site Trunking .................................69 5.9 Calls.............................................................70 5.9.1 Group Calls....................................71 5.9.1.1 Making Group Calls......... 71 English 5.9.1.2 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List................ 72 5.9.1.3 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key ................................ 72 5.9.1.4 Making Group Calls by Using the Alias Search ................73 5.9.1.5 Responding to Group Calls............................................. 75 5.9.2.1 Making Broadcast Calls .. 76 5.9.2.2 Making Broadcast Calls Using the Contact List ................. 76 5.9.2.3 Making Broadcast Calls Using the Programmable Number Key................................. 77 5.9.2.4 Receiving Broadcast Calls ............................................ 77 5.9.3 Private Call.................................... 78 5.9.3.1 Making Private Calls........ 78 5.9.3.2 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key ................................ 79 5 English 6 5.9.3.3 Making Private Calls by Using the Alias Search ................80 5.9.3.4 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button ..... 81 5.9.3.5 Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial.................. 82 5.9.3.6 Receiving Private Calls.... 83 5.9.3.7 Accepting Private Calls ... 83 5.9.3.8 Declining Private Calls .... 84 5.9.4.1 Receiving All Calls .......... 85 5.9.4.2 Making All Calls .............. 85 5.9.4.3 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key ................................ 86 5.9.4.4 Making All Calls by Using the Alias Search.................87 5.9.4 All Calls .........................................84 5.9.5 Phone Calls................................... 88 5.9.5.1 Making Phone Calls......... 88 5.9.5.2 Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Button

.......90 5.9.5.3 Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List ............... 92 5.9.5.4 Making Phone Calls by Using the Alias Search.................94 5.9.5.5 Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial.................. 95 5.9.5.6 Dual Tone Multi Frequency.................................... 97 5.9.5.6.1 Initiating DTMF Calls.................................. 97 5.9.5.7 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls.......................... 97 5.9.5.8 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls.................... 97 5.9.5.9 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls................... 98 5.9.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt............ 99 5.9.7 Call Preemption............................. 99 5.9.8 Voice Interrupt............................... 99 5.9.8.1 Enabling Voice Interrupt.100 5.10 Advanced Features................................. 100 5.10.1 Call Queue.................................101 5.10.2 Priority Call................................ 101 5.10.3 Talkgroup Scan .........................102 5.10.3.1 Turning Talkgroup Scan On or Off........................... 102 5.10.4 Receive Group List.................... 103 5.10.5 Priority Monitor...........................103 5.10.5.1 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup................................... 104 5.10.6 Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation.......... 105 5.10.6.1 Adding Talkgroup Affiliation.................................... 105 5.10.6.2 Removing Talkgroup Affiliation.................................... 106 5.10.7 Talkback ................................... 107 5.10.8 Bluetooth....................................107 5.10.8.1 Turning Bluetooth On and Off....................................... 108 5.10.8.2 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices...................... 109 5.10.8.3 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode.................... 110 5.10.8.4 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices...................... 110 English 5.10.8.5 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device.................111 5.10.8.6 Viewing Device Details 111 5.10.8.7 Editing Device Name... 112 5.10.8.8 Deleting Device Name. 112 5.10.8.9 Adjusting Bluetooth Mic Gain Values............................... 113 5.10.8.10 Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode.................... 113 5.10.9 Indoor Location.......................... 114 5.10.9.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off.................................... 114 5.10.9.2 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information... 116 5.10.10 Job Tickets...............................116 5.10.10.1 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder.............................. 117 5.10.10.2 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server..................... 118 5.10.10.3 Creating Job Tickets.. 118 5.10.10.4 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template.119 7 English 8 5.10.10.5 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template......................... 119 5.10.10.6 Responding to Job Tickets........................................120 5.10.10.7 Deleting Job Tickets...121 5.10.10.8 Deleting All Job Tickets........................................122 5.10.11 Multi-Site Controls................... 122 5.10.11.1 Enabling Manual Site Search........................................123 5.10.11.2 Site Lock On/Off.........124 5.10.11.3 Accessing Neighbor Sites List.................................... 124 5.10.12 Home Channel Reminder........ 124 5.10.12.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder..................... 125 5.10.12.2 Setting New Home Channels....................................125 5.10.13 Remote Monitor....................... 125 5.10.13.1 Initiating Remote Monitor....................................... 126 5.10.13.2 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List ............................................ 126 5.10.13.3 Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Manual Dial.............................................127 5.10.14 Contacts Settings.....................128 5.10.14.1 Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys ....129 5.10.14.2 Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys .......................................... 130 5.10.14.3 Adding New Contacts

................................................... 131 5.10.15 Call Indicator Settings..............131 5.10.15.1 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls............................... 131 5.10.15.2 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages ..........................132 5.10.15.3 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts...................................133 5.10.15.4 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text........ 134 5.10.15.5 Assigning Ring Styles 134 5.10.15.6 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume..............................135 5.10.16.1 Viewing Recent Calls. 136 5.10.16.2 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List........................ 136 5.10.16.3 Deleting Calls from the Call List................................ 137 5.10.16.4 Viewing Details from the Call List................................ 138 5.10.16 Call Log Features ................... 136 5.10.17 Call Alert Operation................. 138 5.10.17.1 Making Call Alerts...... 139 5.10.17.2 Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List.............. 139 5.10.17.3 Responding to Call Alerts .........................................140 English 5.10.18 Dynamic Caller Alias................141 5.10.18.1 Editing Your Caller Alias After Turning On the Radio

................................................... 141 5.10.18.2 Editing Your Caller Alias from the Main Menu.......... 141 5.10.18.3 Viewing the Caller Aliases List.................................142 5.10.18.4 Initiating Private Call From the Caller Aliases List....... 142 5.10.19 Mute Mode...............................143 5.10.19.1 Turning On Mute Mode.......................................... 143 5.10.19.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer.......................................... 144 5.10.19.3 Exiting Mute Mode..... 144 5.10.20 Emergency Operation..............145 5.10.20.1 Sending Emergency Alarms........................................ 146 5.10.20.2 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call......................... 147 5.10.20.3 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow....... 149 9 English 10 5.10.21 Status Message....................... 153 5.10.20.4 Receiving Emergency Alarms ....................................... 150 5.10.20.5 Responding to Emergency Alarms ....................151 5.10.20.6 Responding to Emergency Alarms with Call...... 152 5.10.20.7 Exiting Emergency Mode.......................................... 153 5.10.21.1 Sending Status Messages...................................153 5.10.21.2 Sending Status Message by Using Programmable Button................ 154 5.10.21.3 Sending a Status Message by Using the Contacts List............................................. 155 5.10.21.4 Sending Status Message by Using Manual Dial. 156 5.10.21.5 Viewing Status Messages...................................157 5.10.21.6 Responding to Status Messages...................................157 5.10.21.7 Deleting a Status Message.................................... 158 5.10.21.8 Deleting All Status Messages ..................................159 5.10.22 Text Messaging ...................... 159 5.10.22.1 Text Messages...........160 5.10.22.1.1 Viewing Text Messages........................ 160 5.10.22.1.2 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages........................ 160 5.10.22.1.3 Viewing Saved Text Messages.....161 5.10.22.1.4 Responding to Text Messages............ 161 5.10.22.1.5 Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text....................... 162 5.10.22.1.6 Forwarding Text Messages................ 163 5.10.22.1.7 Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial............... 164 5.10.22.1.8 Editing Text Messages........................ 164 5.10.22.1.9 Sending Text Messages........................ 165 5.10.22.1.10 Editing Saved Text Messages.....166 5.10.22.1.11 Resending Text Messages................ 167 5.10.22.1.12 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox............................... 167 5.10.22.1.13 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox............................... 168 5.10.22.1.14 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder..... 168 5.10.22.2 Sent Text Messages.. 169 5.10.22.2.1 Viewing Sent Text Messages................ 169 5.10.22.2.2 Sending Sent Text Messages................ 170 5.10.23 Text Entry Configuration.......... 172 English 5.10.22.2.3 Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder............ 171 5.10.22.3 Quick Text Messages

................................................... 171 5.10.22.3.1 Sending Quick Text Messages .....171 5.10.23.1 Word Predict.............. 172 5.10.23.2 Sentence Cap............ 173 5.10.23.3 Viewing Custom Words.........................................174 5.10.23.4 Editing Custom Words

................................................... 174 5.10.23.5 Adding Custom Words

................................................... 175 5.10.23.6 Deleting a Custom Word.......................................... 176 5.10.23.7 Deleting All Custom Words.........................................177 5.10.24 Privacy..................................... 178 5.10.24.1 Turning Privacy On or Off.............................................. 178 11 English 12 5.10.25 Stun/Revive............................. 179 5.10.25.1 Stunning a Radio....... 180 5.10.25.2 Stunning a Radio by Using the Contacts List ............. 180 5.10.25.3 Stunning a Radio by Using the Manual Dial................ 181 5.10.25.4 Reviving a Radio........ 182 5.10.25.5 Reviving a Radio by Using the Contacts List.............. 182 5.10.25.6 Reviving a Radio by Using the Manual Dial................ 183 5.10.26 Radio Kill..................................184 5.10.27 Lone Worker............................ 184 5.10.28 Password Lock........................ 185 5.10.28.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password.................... 185 5.10.28.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State.............................. 186 5.10.28.3 Changing Passwords. 186 5.10.29 Notification List ....................... 187 5.10.29.1 Accessing Notification List ............................................ 187 5.10.30 Over-the-Air Programming ......188 5.10.31 Received Signal Strength Indicator................................................ 188 5.10.31.1 Viewing RSSI Values. 189 5.10.32 Front Panel Programming........189 5.10.32.1 Entering Front Panel Programming Mode................... 189 5.10.32.2 Editing Mode Parameters................................ 189 5.10.33 Wi-Fi Operation........................190 5.10.33.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off.............................................. 191 5.10.33.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control)...................................... 191 5.10.33.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control)...................................... 192 5.10.33.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point................ 193 5.10.33.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status......................194 5.10.33.6 Refreshing the Network List............................... 195 5.10.33.7 Adding a Network.......195 5.10.33.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points.............. 196 5.10.33.9 Removing Network Access Points............................ 197 5.10.34 Dynamic Group Number Assignment (DGNA)............................. 197 5.10.34.1 Making DGNA Calls... 198 5.10.34.2 Making Non-DGNA Calls........................................... 198 5.10.34.3 Receiving and Responding to DGNA Calls....... 199 5.11 Utilities..................................................... 199 5.11.1 Keypad Lock Options.................199 5.11.1.1 Enabling the Keypad Lock Option................................ 200 5.11.1.2 Disabling the Keypad Lock Option................................ 200 5.11.2 Turning Acoustic Feedback Suppressor On or Off............................201 5.11.3 Identifying Cable Type............... 201 English 5.11.4 Setting Menu Timer................... 202 5.11.5 Text-to-Speech.......................... 202 5.11.5.1 Setting Text-to-Speech 203 5.11.6 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off.................... 204 5.11.7 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off.....................................................204 5.11.8 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.....................................................205 5.11.9 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels.........................................206 5.11.10 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off.....................................................207 5.11.11 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off......................................................... 207 5.11.12 Setting Text Message Alert Tones....................................................208 5.11.13 Power Levels........................... 209 5.11.13.1 Setting Power Levels. 209 5.11.14 Changing Display Modes.........210 5.11.15 Adjusting Display Brightness... 210 5.11.16 Setting Display Backlight Timer

..............................................................211 13 English 14 5.11.17 Turning Backlight Auto On or Off......................................................... 211 5.11.18 Turning LED Indicators On or Off......................................................... 212 5.11.19 Setting Languages...................212 5.11.20 Turning Option Board On or Off......................................................... 213 5.11.21 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off .............................................. 213 5.11.22 Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off ..................................... 214 5.11.23 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Wired Accessory................................... 215 5.11.24 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off......................................................... 215 5.11.25 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off.....................................................216 5.11.26 Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On or Off.....................................................216 5.11.27 Setting Audio Ambience.......... 217 5.11.28 Setting Audio Profiles.............. 218 5.11.29 General Radio Information ......219 5.11.29.1 Accessing Battery Information ................................ 219 5.11.29.2 Checking Radio Alias and ID ....................................... 220 5.11.29.3 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions..............220 5.11.29.4 Checking GNSS Information................................. 221 5.11.29.5 Checking Software Update Information.................... 221 5.11.29.6 Displaying Site Information................................. 222 5.11.30 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details..................................222 Part II: Other Systems................................................ 224 6.1 Push-To-Talk Button..................................224 6.2 Programmable Buttons..............................224 6.3 Assignable Radio Functions...................... 224 6.4 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions.... 227 6.5 Accessing Programmed Functions............228 6.6 Status Indicators........................................228 6.6.1 Icons............................................ 228 6.6.2 LED Indicators ............................ 235 6.6.3 Tones...........................................236 6.6.3.1 Indicator Tones.............. 236 6.6.3.2 Audio Tones...................236 6.7 Zone and Channel Selections................... 237 6.7.1 Selecting Zones .......................... 237 6.7.2 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search..........................................237 6.7.3 Selecting Channels......................238 6.8 Calls...........................................................238 6.8.1 Group Calls..................................239 6.8.1.1 Responding to Group Calls........................................... 239 6.8.1.2 Making Group Calls....... 240 6.8.1.3 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List ............. 241 6.8.1.4 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key

..........................242 6.8.1.5 Making Group Calls by Using the Channel Selector Knob...........................................243 6.8.2 Private Calls

........................... 244 English 6.8.2.1 Responding to Private Calls

......................................244 6.8.2.2 Making Private Calls

. 245 6.8.2.3 Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List

.........245 6.8.2.4 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key

..........................246 6.8.2.5 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Manual Dial Button.....................247 6.8.3 All Calls........................................248 6.8.3.1 Receiving All Calls......... 248 6.8.3.2 Making All Calls............. 249 6.8.3.3 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key .............................. 249 6.8.4 Selective Calls

........................ 250 6.8.4.1 Responding to Selective Calls

......................................250 6.8.4.2 Making Selective Calls... 251 15 English 6.8.4.3 Making Selective Calls by Using the Channel Selector Knob...........................................252 6.8.5 Phone Calls

............................ 252 6.8.5.1 Dual Tone Multi Frequency.................................. 253 6.8.5.1.1 Initiating DTMF Calls................................ 253 6.8.5.2 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls 6.8.5.3 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls

............. 254

............254 6.8.5.4 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls

................... 255 6.8.5.5 Making Phone Calls

..256 6.8.5.6 Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List

.........257 6.8.5.7 Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Phone Button

................................... 260 6.8.5.8 Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial

...........261 6.8.7 Broadcast Voice Calls..................264 6.8.7.1 Making Broadcast Voice Calls........................................... 264 6.8.7.2 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key ..... 265 6.8.7.3 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Alias Search

...............................................265 6.8.7.4 Receiving Broadcast Voice Calls................................. 266 6.8.8 Unaddressed Calls...................... 267 6.8.8.1 Making Unaddressed Calls........................................... 267 6.8.8.2 Responding to Unaddressed Calls.....................268 6.8.9 Open Voice Channel Mode

(OVCM).................................................268 6.8.9.1 Making OVCM Calls.......269 6.8.9.2 Responding to OVCM Calls........................................... 269 6.9 Advanced Features................................... 270 6.9.1 Bluetooth......................................270 6.8.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt

.....263 16 6.9.1.1 Turning Bluetooth On and Off....................................... 271 6.9.1.2 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices...................................... 272 6.9.1.3 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode...273 6.9.1.4 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices...................... 273 6.9.1.5 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device................. 274 6.9.1.6 Viewing Device Details.. 274 6.9.1.7 Editing Device Name..... 275 6.9.1.8 Deleting Device Name... 275 6.9.1.9 Bluetooth Mic Gain.........276 6.9.1.10 Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode.................... 276 6.9.2 Indoor Location............................ 277 6.9.2.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off.................................... 277 6.9.2.2 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information... 279 6.9.3 Job Tickets...................................279 English 6.9.3.1 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder......................................... 280 6.9.3.2 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server........................... 281 6.9.3.3 Creating Job Tickets...... 281 6.9.3.4 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template.282 6.9.3.5 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template......................... 282 6.9.3.6 Responding to Job Tickets........................................283 6.9.3.7 Deleting Job Tickets.......284 6.9.3.8 Deleting All Job Tickets..285 6.9.4 Multi-Site Control

.............. 286 6.9.4.1 Starting Automatic Site Search........................................286 6.9.4.2 Stopping Automatic Site Search........................................287 6.9.4.3 Enabling Manual Site Search........................................287 6.9.5 Text Entry Configuration.............. 288 17 English 18 6.9.5.1 Enabling or Disabling Word Predict.............................. 289 6.9.5.2 Sentence Cap................ 290 6.9.5.3 Viewing Custom Words..290 6.9.5.4 Editing Custom Words... 291 6.9.5.5 Adding Custom Words... 292 6.9.5.6 Deleting a Custom Word 293 6.9.5.7 Deleting All Custom Words.........................................294 6.9.6 Talkaround...................................294 6.9.6.1 Toggling Between Repeater and Talkaround Modes........................................ 295 6.9.7 Monitor Feature .......................... 295 6.9.7.1 Monitoring Channels...... 295 6.9.7.2 Permanent Monitor ....... 296 6.9.7.2.1 Turning Permanent Monitor On or Off................................... 296 6.9.8 Radio Check ............................... 296 6.9.8.1 Sending Radio Checks

...............................................297 6.9.8.2 Sending Radio Checks by Using the Contacts List

.... 297 6.9.9 Remote Monitor........................... 298 6.9.9.1 Initiating Remote Monitor

................................................... 298 6.9.9.2 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List ........ 299 6.9.9.3 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Manual Dial .......... 300 6.9.10 Scan Lists.................................. 301 6.9.10.1 Viewing Entries in the Scan List ................................... 302 6.9.10.2 Viewing Entries in the Scan List by Using the Alias Search .......................................302 6.9.10.3 Adding New Entries to the Scan List.............................. 303 6.9.10.4 Deleting Entries from the Scan List.............................. 303 6.9.10.5 Setting Priority for Entries in the Scan List.............. 304 6.9.11 Scan...........................................305 6.9.11.1 Turning Scan On or Off

................................................... 305 6.9.11.2 Responding to Transmissions During Scanning 306 6.9.11.3 Deleting Nuisance Channels....................................307 6.9.11.4 Restoring Nuisance Channels....................................307 6.9.12 Vote Scan

....................... 308 6.9.13 Contacts Settings.......................308 6.9.13.1 Adding New Contacts . 309 6.9.13.2 Setting Default Contact

...............................................309 6.9.13.3 Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys

................................................... 310 6.9.13.4 Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys

................................................... 311 6.9.14 Call Indicator Settings................311 English 6.9.14.1 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts...................................312 6.9.14.2 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls

..........................312 6.9.14.3 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls 6.9.14.4 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages

...................... 313

..................... 314 6.9.14.5 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text........ 315 6.9.14.6 Assigning Ring Styles.. 316 6.9.14.7 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume.......................................316 6.9.15 Call Log Features ..................... 317 6.9.15.1 Viewing Recent Calls... 317 6.9.15.2 Viewing Call List Details

...................................318 19 6.9.15.3 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List

...................318 6.9.15.4 Deleting Calls from the Call List...................................... 319 6.9.16 Call Alert Operation................... 320 6.9.16.1 Responding to Call Alerts ......................................... 320 6.9.16.2 Making Call Alerts........ 320 6.9.16.3 Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List.............. 321 6.9.17 Dynamic Caller Alias..................322 6.9.17.1 Editing Your Caller Alias After Turning On the Radio

................................................... 322 6.9.17.2 Editing Your Caller Alias from the Main Menu.......... 322 6.9.17.3 Viewing the Caller Aliases List................................. 323 6.9.17.4 Initiating Private Call From the Caller Aliases List....... 323 6.9.18 Mute Mode.................................324 English 20 6.9.18.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer.......................................... 325 6.9.18.3 Exiting Mute Mode....... 325 6.9.19 Emergency Operation ...............326 6.9.19.1 Receiving Emergency Alarms........................................ 327 6.9.19.2 Responding to Emergency Alarms.....................328 6.9.19.3 Sending Emergency Alarms ....................................... 329 6.9.19.4 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call ........................ 330 6.9.19.5 Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow ..........................331 6.9.19.6 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow

..332 6.9.19.7 Reinitiating Emergency Mode.......................................... 332 6.9.20 Man Down..................................333 6.9.20.1 Turning the Man Down Feature On or Off....................... 333 6.9.21.1 Text Messages

....... 334 6.9.18.1 Turning On Mute Mode 324 6.9.21 Text Messaging ........................ 334 6.9.21.1.1 Viewing Text Messages........................ 334 6.9.21.1.2 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages........................ 335 6.9.21.1.3 Viewing Saved Text Messages................ 335 6.9.21.1.4 Responding to Text Messages 6.9.21.1.5 Replying to Text Messages................ 337

...........336 6.9.21.1.6 Forwarding Text Messages

...........338 6.9.21.1.7 Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial

.......... 338 6.9.21.1.8 Editing Text Messages........................ 339 6.9.21.1.9 Sending Text Messages........................ 340 6.9.21.1.10 Editing Saved Text Messages................ 341 6.9.21.1.11 Resending Text Messages................ 341 English 6.9.21.1.12 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox 342 6.9.21.1.13 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox

.......................... 342 6.9.21.1.14 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder..... 343 6.9.21.2 Sent Text Messages

................................................... 344 6.9.21.2.1 Viewing Sent Text Messages

...........344 6.9.21.2.2 Sending Sent Text Messages

...........345 6.9.21.2.3 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder ..... 346 6.9.21.3 Quick Text Messages

...............................................346 6.9.21.3.1 Sending Quick Text Messages................ 346 6.9.22 Privacy

..................................348 21 English 22 6.9.22.1 Turning Privacy On or Off

......................................... 348 6.9.23 Security

.................................349 6.9.23.1 Disabling Radios 6.9.23.2 Disabling Radios by Using the Contacts List

.........350

.....349 6.9.23.3 Disabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial

...........351 6.9.23.4 Enabling Radios 6.9.23.5 Enabling Radios by Using the Contacts List

.........352

......351 6.9.23.6 Enabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial

...........353 6.9.24 Lone Worker.............................. 354 6.9.25 Notification List ......................... 354 6.9.25.1 Accessing Notification List ............................................ 355 6.9.26 Auto-Range Transponder System

.......................................355 6.9.27 Over-the-Air Programming

... 356 6.9.28 Password Lock.......................... 356 6.9.28.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password......................... 356 6.9.28.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State.............................. 357 6.9.28.3 Changing Passwords... 358 6.9.29 Wi-Fi Operation..........................359 6.9.29.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off359 6.9.29.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control)...................................... 360 6.9.29.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control)...................................... 361 6.9.29.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point................ 362 6.9.29.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status......................363 6.9.29.6 Refreshing the Network List............................................. 364 6.9.29.7 Adding a Network.........364 6.9.29.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points.............. 365 6.9.29.9 Removing Network Access Points............................ 366 6.9.30 Front Panel Programming..........366 6.9.30.1 Entering Front Panel Programming Mode................... 367 6.9.30.2 Editing Mode Parameters................................ 367 6.10 Utilities..................................................... 367 6.10.1 Keypad Lock Options.................367 6.10.1.1 Enabling the Keypad Lock Option................................ 368 6.10.1.2 Disabling the Keypad Lock Option................................ 368 6.10.2 Turning Automatic Call Forwarding On or Off............................ 369 6.10.3 Identifying Cable Type............... 369 6.10.4 Flexible Receive List

.............370 6.10.4.1 Turning Flexible Receive List On or Off................370 6.10.4.2 Adding New Entries to the Flexible Receive List............ 371 6.10.4.3 Deleting Entries from the Flexible Receive List............ 372 English 6.10.4.4 Deleting Entries From the Flexible Receive List Using Alias Search...............................373 6.10.5 Setting Menu Timer................... 374 6.10.6 Setting Text-to-Speech.............. 374 6.10.7 Turning Acoustic Feedback Suppressor On or Off

...................... 375 6.10.8 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off.................... 376 6.10.9 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off.....................................................377 6.10.10 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.....................................................377 6.10.11 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels.........................................378 6.10.12 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off.....................................................379 6.10.13 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off......................................................... 379 6.10.14 Setting Text Message Alert Tones....................................................380 6.10.15 Changing Display Modes.........381 6.10.16 Adjusting Display Brightness... 381 23 English 24 6.10.17 Setting Display Backlight Timer

..............................................................382 6.10.18 Turning Backlight Auto On or Off......................................................... 383 6.10.19 Squelch Levels ....................... 383 6.10.19.1 Setting Squelch Levels ........................................383 6.10.20 Turning LED Indicators On or Off......................................................... 384 6.10.21 Setting Languages...................385 6.10.22 Voice Operating Transmission.385 6.10.22.1 Turning Voice Operating Transmission On or Off.............................................. 386 6.10.23 Turning Option Board On or Off......................................................... 386 6.10.24 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off .............................................. 387 6.10.25 Turning Analog Microphone AGC On or Off ..................................... 387 6.10.26 Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off ..................................... 388 6.10.27 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Wired Accessory................................... 389 6.10.28 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off......................................................... 389 6.10.29 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off.....................................................390 6.10.30 Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On or Off.....................................................391 6.10.31 Audio Ambience.......................391 6.10.31.1 Setting Audio Ambience................................... 392 6.10.32 Audio Profiles...........................392 6.10.32.1 Setting Audio Profiles.393 6.10.33 General Radio Information ......393 6.10.33.1 Accessing Battery Information ................................ 394 6.10.33.2 Checking Radio Alias and ID ....................................... 394 6.10.33.3 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions..............395 6.10.33.4 Checking GNSS Information................................. 395 6.10.33.5 Checking Software Update Information.................... 396 6.10.33.6 Displaying Site Information................................. 397 6.10.34 Received Signal Strength Indicator................................................ 397 6.10.34.1 Viewing RSSI Values. 397 6.10.35 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details..................................397 Part III: Authorized Accessories List...........................399 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range.... 402 Special Channel Assignments.........................402 Emergency Channel............................. 402 Non-Commercial Call Channel............. 402 Operating Frequency Requirements............... 403 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies.....................405 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources...................................................405 Batteries and Chargers Warranty...............................406 The Workmanship Warranty............................ 406 The Capacity Warranty....................................406 Limited Warranty........................................................ 407 English MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.................... 407 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:........................................... 407 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS............................ 408 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:................................408 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE......408 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER............................................................409 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS409 VII. GOVERNING LAW................................... 410 25 This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. English Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios CAUTION:

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the user's authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum

(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. 26 Notice to Users (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. English 27 English Notice to Users (Industry Canada) The operation of your Motorola Solutions radio is subject to the Radiocommunications Act and must comply with rules and regulations of the Federal Governments department of Industry Canada. Industry Canada requires that all operators using Private Land Mobile frequencies obtain a radio license before operating their equipment. 28 Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R02.20.02.0000 or later. See Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions on page 220 to determine the software version of your radio. Contact your dealer or administrator for more information. English 29 English Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. 30 Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a specific mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Open Source Content This product contains Open Source software used under license. Refer to the product installation media for full Open Source Legal Notices and Attribution content. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. English 31 patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,

#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,

#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,

#5,226,084 and #5,195,166. English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. The AMBE+2 voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including 32 Radio Care This section describes the basic handling precaution of the radio. Table 1: IP Specification IP Specification Description IP67 Allows your radio to with-

stand adverse field condi-

tions such as being sub-

mersed in water. CAUTION:

Do not disassemble your radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Radio maintenance should only be done in service depot that is equipped to test and replace the seal on the radio. If your radio has been submersed in water, shake your radio well to remove any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port. Trapped water could cause decreased audio performance. If your radio's battery contact area has been exposed to water, clean and dry battery contacts on both your radio English and the battery before attaching the battery to radio. The residual water could short-circuit the radio. If your radio has been submersed in a corrosive substance (for example, saltwater), rinse radio and battery in fresh water then dry radio and battery. To clean the exterior surfaces of your radio, use a diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and fresh water (for example, one teaspoon of detergent to one gallon of water). Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radio chassis below the battery contact. This vent allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Doing so may create a leak path into radio and your radio's submersibility may be lost. Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with a label. Ensure that no oily substances come in contact with the vent. Your radio with antenna attached properly is designed to be submersible to a maximum depth of 1 m (3.28 ft) and a maximum submersion time of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximum limit or use without antenna may result in damage to your radio. 33 English When cleaning your radio, do not use a high pressure jet spray on radio as this will exceed the 1 m depth pressure and may cause water to leak into your radio. 34 Which buttons have been programmed to access other Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature. Introduction Icon Information This user guide covers the operation of your radios. Your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

What are the best radio usage practices for effective What maintenance procedures that helps promote features?

communication?

longer radio life?

1.1 English Throughout this publication, the icons described are used to indicate features supported in either the conventional analog or conventional digital mode. Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature. For features that are available in both conventional analog and digital modes, both icons are not shown. 1.2 Conventional Analog and Digital Modes Each channel in your radio can be configured as a conventional analog or conventional digital channel. 1 : Channel Selector Knob 35 English Certain features are unavailable when switching from digital to analog mode. The icons for digital features reflect this change by appearing grayed out. The disabled features are hidden in the menu. Your radio also has features available in both analog and digital modes. The minor differences in the way each feature works do not affect the performance of your radio. NOTICE:

Your radio also switches between digital and analog modes during a dual mode scan. See Scan on page 305 for more information. 1.3 IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventional communication beyond the reach of a single site by connecting to different available sites by using an Internet Protocol (IP) network. This is a conventional multi-site mode. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, the radio connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls or data transmissions. This is done either automatically or manually depending on your settings. 36 In an automatic site search, the radio scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. The radio then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range but which may not have the strongest signal and locks on to the repeater. NOTICE:

Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam enabled, not both at the same time. Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches the channels in the roam list during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels, including the selected channel. NOTICE:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry in the roam list. Contact your dealer for more information. 1.4 Capacity PlusSingle-Site Capacity PlusSingle-Site is a single-site trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of programmed channels while in Repeater Mode. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity PlusSingle-Site by using a programmable button press. Your radio also has features that are available in conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, and Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. 1.5 Capacity PlusMulti-Site Capacity PlusMulti-Site is a multi-channel trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, combining English the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect configurations. Capacity PlusMulti-Site allows your radio to extend trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected with an IP network. It also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently utilizing the combined available number of programmed channels supported by each of the available sites. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest RSSI value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Any channel with Capacity PlusMulti-Site enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches these 37 English channels during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. NOTICE:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Similar to Capacity PlusSingle Site, icons of features not applicable to Capacity PlusMulti-Site are not available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity PlusMulti-Site by using a programmable button press. 38 Getting Started Getting Started provides instructions to prepare your radio for use. 2.1 Charging the Battery English Always charge your IMPRES battery with an IMPRES charger for optimized battery life and valuable battery data. IMPRES batteries charged exclusively with IMPRES chargers receive a 6-month capacity warranty extension over the standard Motorola Solutions Premium battery warranty duration. For best performance, your radio is powered by a Motorola Solutions-approved Lithium-Ion (Li-lon) battery. 2.2 Attaching the Battery Charge your battery only in non-hazardous areas. After battery is charged, allow your radio to rest for at least 3 minutes. To avoid damage and comply with warranty terms, charge the battery using a Motorola Solutios charger exactly as described in the charger user guide. Charge your battery only in non-hazardous areas. After battery is charged, allow your radio to rest for at least 3 minutes. If battery is attached to your radio, ensure that your radio remains powered off while charging. Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial use for best performance. Follow the procedure to attach the battery to your radio. NOTICE:

Do not replace battery in combustible gas and dust environments. Replace battery only in non-hazardous areas. The certification of the radio is voided if you attach a non-CSA battery to the radio. This battery mismatch alert feature is only applicable for IMPRES battery and Non-IMPRES battery with kit number programmed in Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM). When the radio is attached with the wrong battery, a low pitched warning tone sounds, the LED lights up blinking red, display shows Wrong Battery and the Voice Announcement/Text-to-Speech sounds Wrong Battery if 39 English the Voice Announcement/Text-to-Speech is loaded by using CPS. When the radio is attached with non-Motorola Solutions battery, an alert tone sounds, display shows Unknown Battery, and battery icon is disabled. 1 Align the battery with the rails on the back of the radio. 2 Press the battery firmly, and slide upward until the latch snaps into place. Attaching the Antenna Turn off your radio. Set the antenna in the receptacle and turn clockwise. NOTICE:

To protect best against water and dust, ensure that antenna is tightly fitted. 3 Slide battery latch into lock position. 2.3 40 NOTICE:

To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. CAUTION:

To prevent damages, replace the faulty antenna with only MOTOTRBO antennas. 2.4 Attaching the Belt Clip 1 To attach the belt clip, align the grooves on the clip with those on the battery and press downward until you hear a click. English 2.5 Attaching the Universal Connector Cover The universal connector is located on the antenna side of the radio. It is used to connect MOTOTRBO accessories to the radio. Replace the universal connector cover or dust cover when the universal connector is not in use. 1 Insert the slanted end of the cover into the slots above the universal connector. 2 Press downwards on the cover to seat the dust cover properly on the universal connector. 2 To remove the belt clip, press the belt clip tab away from the battery using a key. Then slide the clip upward and away from the radio. 41 English 3 Secure the connector cover to the radio by turning the thumbscrew clockwise. 2.6 Turning the Radio On Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control knob clockwise until it clicks. If successful, your radio shows the following indications:

A tone sounds. NOTICE:

If the Tones/Alerts function is disabled, there is no tone upon powering up. The green LED lights up. welcome message or image. The Home screen lights up. If the LED indicator is disabled, the Home screen does not light up during a power-up. 42 NOTICE:

During the initial power-up after a software version update to R02.07.00.0000 or later, a GNSS firmware upgrade takes place for 20 seconds. After the upgrade, the radio resets and turns on. This firmware upgrade is only applicable for portable models with the latest software and hardware. If your radio does not power up, check your battery. Make sure that the battery is charged and properly attached. Contact your dealer if your radio still does not power up. 2.7 Adjusting the Volume To adjust the volume of your radio, perform one of the following actions:

Control knob clockwise. To decrease the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume Control knob counterclockwise. The display shows MOTOTRBO (TM), followed by a To increase the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume NOTICE:

Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum volume offset where the volume level cannot be lowered past the programmed minimum volume. English 43 English Radio Controls This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control the radio. 1 Channel Selector Knob 1 These buttons are programmable. 44 2 On/Off/Volume Control Knob 3 LED Indicator 4 Side Button 11 5 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button 6 Side Button 21 7 Side Button 31 8 Front Button P11 9 Menu/OK Button 10 4-Way Navigation Button 11 Keypad 12 Back/Home Button 13 Front Button P21 14 Display 15 Microphone 16 Speaker 17 Universal Connector for Accessories 18 Emergency Button1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 You can use the 4way navigation button, number, alias, or free form text editor.

, as a 19 Antenna 3.1 Using the 4Way Navigation Button You can use the 4way navigation button,

, to scroll through options, increase/decrease values, and navigate vertically. Category Direction Menu Lists or or Vertical Naviga-

tion Vertical Naviga-

tion

Editor Catego-

ry Direction or Number Alias

Free Form Text Move cursor up/

down View Details Vertical Naviga-

tion Previous/Next Item Numeric Values Increase/

Decrease English or Left : Delete last digit Right : -

Move cursor one character left/right-

Move cursor one character right/left Move cursor one character right/left 45 You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radio features. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The following table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. 5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12

13

English 3.2 Using the Keypad Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 A 2

. B 3

, C D E F 4

2 3 46 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 G 2 H 3 I J K L 4 4 5 M N O 6 P Q R S 7 English 47 English Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 2 U 3 V 4 8 W X Y Z 9 1 T 0

* or del

# or space 48 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NOTICE:

Press to enter 0 and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off the CAPS lock. NOTICE:

Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a *. NOTICE:

Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a #. Long press to change text entry method. WAVE Wide Area Voice Environment (WAVE) provides a new method of making calls between two or more radios. WAVE allows you to communicate across different networks and devices using Wi-Fi. WAVE calls are made when the radio is connected to an IP network through Wi-

Fi. Your radio supports different system configurations:

WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise WAVE Tactical/5000 The method to initiate a WAVE Call is different for each system type. Refer to the appropriate section depending on the system configuration of your radio. Table 2: WAVE Display Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display when WAVE is enabled. WAVE Connected WAVE is connected. English WAVE Disconnected WAVE is disconnected. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to specific models only. 4.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise 4.1.1 Switching from Radio Mode to WAVE Mode 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed WAVE button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 49 Press or to WAVE. Press to select. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows a momentary notice of Switching to WAVE, then shows Preparing WAVE. NOTICE:

Synchronization occurs when new settings are updated to your radio. When you enter the WAVE mode, your radio displays Syncing.... When the synchronization completes, your radio returns to the home screen. NOTICE:

Your radio automatically enables Wi-Fi after you switch to WAVE mode. 4.1.2 Making WAVE Group Calls If successful:

1 Use the channel selector knob or buttons to select a The blinking yellow LED turns off. WAVE talkgroup. The display shows the WAVE connected icon,

<Talkgroup Alias>, and <Channel Index>. 2 To call, press the PTT button. If unsuccessful:

A negative tone sounds. The red LED blinks. If the call is successful, the display shows the Group Call icon and the WAVE talkgroup alias. If the call is unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows the WAVE disconnected icon and No Connection or Activation: Fail, depending on the error type. The display shows a momentary notice of Call Failed or No Participants. English 2 50 4.1.3 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Group Calls When you receive a WAVE group call:

A tone sounds. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 To call, press the PTT button. 2 To listen, release the PTT button. The display shows the group call icon, WAVE talkgroup alias, and caller alias. through the speaker. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds 4.1.5 Switching from WAVE Mode to Radio Mode 1 To call, press the PTT button. 2 To listen, release the PTT button. 4.1.4 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Private Calls When you receive a WAVE private call:

A tone sounds. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Radio Mode button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Radio Mode. Press to The display shows the private call icon and caller alias. The yellow LED double blinks. English 51 English The display shows a momentary notice of Switching to Radio and then shows Preparing Radio. When successful:

The blinking yellow LED turns off. The WAVE connected icon disappears on the status bar. The display shows <Talkgroup Alias> and

<Channel Index>. 52 English Capacity Max If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. Capacity Max is a trunked radio system based on MOTOTRBO control channels. MOTOTRBO digital radio products are marketed by Motorola Solutions primarily to business and industrial users. MOTOTRBO uses the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) Digital Mobile Radio (DMR) standard, that is, two-slot Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), to pack simultaneous voice or data in a 12.5 kHz channel (6.25 kHz equivalent). 5.1 Push-To-Talk Button The Push-to-Talk (PTT) button serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. Long press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5.2 Programmable Buttons Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions. Short press Long press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. NOTICE:

See Emergency Operation on page 326 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. 5.3 Assignable Radio Functions The following radio functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons by your dealer or system administrator. 53 English Audio Profiles Audio Routing Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Call Alert Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Toggles audio routing between internal and external speakers. Call Log Selects the call log list. Audio Toggle Emergency Toggles audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Bluetooth Audio Switch 2 Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Indoor Location2 Toggles Indoor Location on or off. Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Manual Dial Bluetooth Disconnect Initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID. Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Manual Site Roam Starts the manual site search. Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Contacts Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Mic AGC Notifications Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control

(AGC) on or off. Provides direct access to the Notifications list. 2 Only applicable for XPR 7580e IS 54 One Touch Access Site Lock Directly initiates a predefined Broadcast, Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert, or a Quick Text message. When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Option Board Feature Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Status Selects the status list menu. Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. Phone Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Remote Monitor Telemetry Control Text Message Selects the text message menu. Toggle Call Priority Level Enables your radio to enter Call Priority Level High/

Normal. Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Site Info Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Wi-Fi2 Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Zone Selection Displays the current Capacity Max site name and ID. Allows selection from a list of zones. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is enabled. English 55 English 5.4 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions The following radio settings or utility functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Tones/Alerts Backlight Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Toggles display backlight on or off. Backlight Brightness Adjusts the brightness level. Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Toggles keypad between locked and unlocked. Display Mode Keypad Lock Power Level Toggles transmit power level between high and low. 5.5 56 Accessing Programmed Functions Follow the procedure to access programmed functions in your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to the menu function, and press to select a function or enter a sub-menu. 3 Do one of the following:

Press to return to the previous screen. Long press to return to the Home screen. Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to the Home screen. 5.6 Status Indicators This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones used in the radio. 5.6.1 Icons The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, Liquid Crystal Display

(LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the radio display. Table 3: Display Icons The following icons appear on the status bar at the top of the radio display. The icons are arranged left most in order of appearance or usage, and are channel-specific. Battery The number of bars (04) shown indi-

cates the charge remaining in the bat-

3 Only applicable for XPR 7580e IS. English tery. The icon blinks when the battery is low. Bluetooth Connected 3 The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Bluetooth Not Connected3 The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. DGNA Radio is in DGNA Talkgroup. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. GNSS Available GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is availa-

ble. 57 English 58 GNSS Not Available GNSS feature is enabled but is not re-

ceiving data from the satellite. Power Level or Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Mute Mode Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is muted. Notification Notification List has one or more missed events. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. (Option board enabled models only) Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-

er Indicates time left before automatic re-

start of radio. Indicates Priority Talkgroup 1. Priority 1 Priority 2 Indicates Priority Talkgroup 2. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Shared Frequency Indicates radio is locking to shared control channel. Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. Site Roaming The site roaming feature is enabled. Status Indicates a new status message. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Wi-Fi Excellent3 Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good3 Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average3 Wi-Fi signal is average English Wi-Fi Poor3 Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable3 Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Table 4: Advance Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates that the option is selected. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates that the option is not selec-

ted. Solid Black Box Indicates that the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. 59 Table 5: Bluetooth Device Icons Table 6: Call Icons The following icons appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. The following icons appear on the display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate alias or ID type. NOTICE:

Bluetooth feature is only applicable for XPR 7580e IS Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Bluetooth Sensor Device Bluetooth-enabled sensor device, such as gas sensor. Call Priority High Indicating Call Priority Level High is enabled. DGNA Call Indicates a DGNA Call is in progress. Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). English 60 Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a phone alias (name) or ID (number). Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Table 7: Job Tickets Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display in the Job Ticket folder. All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. New Jobs Indicates new jobs. English In Progress Jobs are transmitting. This is seen before indication for Job Tickets Send Failed or Sent Succesfully. Send Failed Jobs cannot be sent. Sent Successfully Jobs have been successfully sent. Indicates Priority Level 1 for jobs. Indicates Priority Level 2 for jobs. Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Indicates Priority Level 3 for jobs. 61 English Table 8: Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display after an action to perform a task is taken. Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Successful Transmission (Positive) Successful action taken. Transmission in Progress (Transi-

tional) Transmitting. This is seen before indi-

cation for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. Table 9: Sent Items Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the display in the Sent Items folder. In Progress or The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledg-

ment. The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. 62 Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. Send Failed The text message cannot be sent. Sent Successfully The text message has been success-

fully sent. or or or or Radio is receiving an emergency transmission. Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert. 5.6.2 LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Blinking Red Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. Radio is transmitting in low battery state. Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Transponder System is configured. Mute Mode is enabled. Solid Green Radio is powering up. Radio is transmitting. Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency transmission. Blinking Green Radio is receiving a call or data. Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissions over the air. Radio is detecting activity over the air. English NOTICE:

This activity may or may not affect the programmed channel of the radio due to the nature of the digital protocol. Double Blinking Green Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Blinking Yellow Double Blinking Yellow Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert. Radio is locked. 5.6.3 Tones High Pitched Tone The following are the tones that sound through on the radio speaker. 63 English Low Pitched Tone 5.6.3.1 Audio Tones 5.6.3.2 Indicator Tones Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Positive Indicator Tone Continuous Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Negative Indicator Tone 5.7 Registration Periodic Tone Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. Repetitive Tone A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Momentary Tone Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio. There are a number of registration-related messages that you may receive. Registering Typically, registration is sent to the system during power-

up, Talkgroup change, or during site roaming. If a radio fails registration on a site, the radio automatically attempts to roam to another site. The radio temporarily removes the site where registration was attempted from the roaming list. The indication means that the radio is busy searching for a site to roam, or that the radio has found a site successfully 64 but is waiting for a response to the registration messages from the radio. When Registering is displayed on the radio, a tone sounds and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. If the indications persist, the user should change locations or if allowed, manually roam to another site. Out of Range A radio is deemed to be out of range when the radio is unable to detect a signal from the system or from the current site. Typically, this indication means that the radio is outside of the geographic outbound radio frequency (RF) coverage range. When Out of Range is displayed on the radio, a repetitive tone sounds and the red LED flashes. Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio still receives out of range indications while being in an area with good RF coverage. English Talkgroup Affiliation Failed A radio tries to affiliate to the Talkgroup specified in the channels or Unified Knob Position (UKP) during registration. A radio that is in affiliation fail state is unable to make or receive calls from the Talkgroup that the radio is trying to affiliate to. When a radio fails to affiliate with a Talkgroup, UKP Alias is displayed in the home screen with a highlighted background. Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio receives affiliation failure indications. Register Denied Registration denied indicators are received when the registration with the system is not accepted. The radio does not indicate to the radio user the specific reason the registration was denied. Normally, a registration is denied when the system operator has disabled the access of the radio to the system. When a radio is denied registration, Register Denied is displayed on the radio and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. 65 English 5.8 Zone and Channel Selections This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or channel on your radio. The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 250 Capacity Max Zones with a maximum of 160 Channels per zone. Each Capacity Max zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions.Each Capacity Max zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions. 5.8.1 Selecting Zones 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Zone Selection button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 66 2 3 1 Press or to Zone. Press to select. The display shows and the current zone. Press select. or to the required zone. Press to The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. 5.8.2 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search Press to access the menu. Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio. Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio by using the alias search. Press or to Zone. Press to select. The display shows and the current zone. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. Selecting a Call Type Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Broadcast Call, All Call, or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position

(that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Capacity Max System. The radio registers with the Talkgroup ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. Press to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. 2 5 5.8.3 English 67 English Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. 5.8.4 Selecting a Site A site provides coverage for a specific area. In a multi-site network, the Capacity Max radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. The Capacity Max system can support up to 250 sites. 5.8.5 68 Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. If there are no sites available:

The radio display shows Searching and continues to search through the list of sites. The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. NOTICE:

This is programmed by your dealer. Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. 5.8.6 Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. 5.8.8 Site Trunking The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. English The radio does not have to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, your radio receives indication that the site is denied. The radio then searches for a different network site. When experiencing site restrictions, your radio displays Register Denied and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. Site Trunking is only available with Capacity Max system. A site must be able to communicate with the Trunk Controller to be considered as System Trunking. If the site cannot communicate with the Trunk Controller in the system, a radio enters Site Trunking mode. While in Site Trunking, the radio provides a periodic audible and visual indication to the user to inform the user of their limited functionality. When a radio is in Site Trunking, the radio displays Site Trunking and a repetitive tone sounds. 5.8.7 Site Restriction In Capacity Max system, your radio administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. The radios in Site Trunking are still able to make group and individual voice calls as well as send text messages to other radios within the same site. Voice consoles, logging 69 recorders, phone gateways, and data applications cannot communicate to the radios at the site. Contacts List This method provides direct access to the Contacts list. Once in Site Trunking, a radio that is involved in calls across multiple sites will only be able to communicate with other radios within the same site. Communication to and from other sites would be lost. NOTICE:

If there are multiple sites that cover the current location of the radio and one of the sites enters Site Trunking, the radio roams to another site if within coverage. This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to, make, and stop calls. You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID after you have selected a channel by using one of these features:

Alias Search This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. Manual Dial (by using Contacts) This method is used for Private and Phone Calls only with a keypad microphone. Programmed Number Keys This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. NOTICE:

You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. All the number keys on a keypad microphone can be assigned. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 310 for more information. Programmed One Touch Access Button This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone Calls only. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button with a short or long programmable button press. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. English 5.9 Calls 70 Programmable Button This method is used for Phone Calls only. 3 Do one of the following:

5.9.1 Group Calls Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive a call from or make a call to the group of users. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. 5.9.1.1 Making Group Calls To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 67. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first text line shows the Group Call icon and alias. English Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The call initiator can press to end a Group Call. 71 Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, English 1 2 5.9.1.2 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List Press to access the menu. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Group Call and the Group Call icon. 5 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 72 Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. 5.9.1.3 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the 4 Release the PTT button to listen. predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias.The second text line displays the call status for Group Call. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. English The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The call initiator can press Call. to end the Group See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 310 for more information. 5.9.1.4 Making Group Calls by Using the Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable 73 English while in Contacts. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see Party Not Available on the display; the radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio presence check. NOTICE:

Press button or to exit alias search. Press to access the menu. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination ID, call type, and Call icon. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. 8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 1 2 74 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. The call initiator can press Call. to end the Group 5.9.1.5 Responding to Group Calls When you receive a Group Call:

The green LED blinks. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. English If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 5.9.2 Broadcast Call A Broadcast Call is a one-way voice call from any user to an entire talkgroup. The Broadcast Call feature allows only the call initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the recipients of the call cannot respond. 75 The broadcast initiator can also end the broadcast call. To receive a call from a group of users, or to call a group of users, the radio must be configured as part of a group. The call initiator can press Call. to end the Broadcast 5.9.2.1 Making Broadcast Calls 1 Do one of the following:

5.9.2.2 Making Broadcast Calls Using the Contact List Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 67. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 1 2 Press to access the menu. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and alias. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 3 Do one of the following:

4 Press the PTT button to make the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The green LED blinks. The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Group Call and the Group Call icon. English 76 The call initiator can press Call. to end the Broadcast 3 Do one of the following:

5 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 5.9.2.3 Making Broadcast Calls Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on your radio using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. English A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press Call. to end the Broadcast 5.9.2.4 Receiving Broadcast Calls Follow the procedure to receive a Broadcast Call on your radio. When you receive a Broadcast Call:

77 English The green LED blinks. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. NOTICE:

Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback during a Broadcast Call. The display shows Talkback Prohibit. The Talkback Prohibit Tone plays momentarily if the PTT button is pressed during a Broadcast Call. 5.9.3 Private Call performing a radio presence check. However, FOACSU calls require user acknowledgment to complete the call and allows the user to either Accept or Decline the call. The type of call is configured by the system administrator. If the target radio is not available prior to setting up the Private Call, the following occur:

A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio presence check. NOTICE:

Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. There are two ways to set up a Private Call. 5.9.3.1 Making Private Calls The first call type is called Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU). OACSU sets up the call after performing a radio presence check and completes the call automatically. Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. If this feature is not enabled, you hear a negative indicator tone when you initiate the call. If the target radio is The second type is called Full Off Air Call Set-Up

(FOACSU). FOACSU also sets up the call after 78 English not available, a short tone sounds and the display show Party Not Available. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 67. Press the programmed One Touch Access 5.9.3.2 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. 5 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone.The display shows Call Ended. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, subscriber ID or alias, and call status. 79 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Making Private Calls by Using the Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias. 5 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. 1 2 NOTICE:

Press button or to exit alias search. Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 310 for more information. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. English 5.9.3.3 80 The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination ID, call type, and Private Call icon. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. 8 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. English Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. 5.9.3.4 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 81 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press to 5 Do one of the following:

terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. proceed. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to 5.9.3.5 Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial Press to access the menu. Edit the previously dialed subscriber ID, and press to proceed. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. clearly into the microphone if enabled. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak English 1 2 82 8 Release the PTT button to listen. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. 5.9.3.6 Receiving Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU):

The green LED blinks. NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is configured, either OACSU or Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU), responding to Private Calls may or may not require user acknowledgment. For the OACSU configuration, your radio unmutes and the call connects automatically. 5.9.3.7 Accepting Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):

The green LED blinks. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. 1 To accept a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do one of the following:

English 83 English Press or to Accept and press to answer a Private Call. Press the PTT button on any entry. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. pressing

. 5.9.3.8 Declining Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):

84 NOTICE:

Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by 5.9.4 All Calls The green LED blinks. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. To decline a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do one of the following:

Press or to Reject and press to decline a Private Call. Press to decline a Private Call. An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site or every radio at a group of sites, depending on system configuration. An All Call is used to make important announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The users on the system cannot respond to an All Call. Capacity Max supports Site All Call and Multi-site All Call. The system administrator may configure one or both of these in your radio. NOTICE:

Subscribers can support System-Wide All Calls but Motorola Solutions infrastructure does not support System-Wide All Calls. When you receive an All Call, the following occur:

5.9.4.1 Receiving All Calls A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias ID. The second text line displays either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. The radio returns to the screen before receiving the All Call when the call ends. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call. NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You are not able to continue with any menu navigation or editing until the call ends during an All Call. 5.9.4.2 Making All Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All Call. 1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 67. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All English 85 English Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. The call initiator can press to end the All Call. 5.9.4.3 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 1 Long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. The call initiator can press to end the All Call. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 310 for more information. 86 5.9.4.4 Making All Calls by Using the Alias Search You can use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio by using the alias search. NOTICE:

Press button or to exit alias search. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. English The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination ID, call type, and Group Call icon. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. NOTICE:

The call initiator can press to end the All Call. 87 English 5.9.5 Phone Calls A Phone Call is a call in between an individual radio or a group of radios and a telephone. Depending on how the radio is configured, the following features may or may not be made available:

Access code De-access code Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone Displaying of caller alias or ID on receiving a phone call Ability to reject or accept a phone call The Phone Call capability can be enabled by assigning and setting up phone numbers on the system. Check with your system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 5.9.5.1 Making Phone Calls Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

88 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Proceed to step 2. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID.Press to select. When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured. 3 Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. 7 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the The green LED lights up. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias, and call status. If the call is successful:

The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows the subscriber alias and the Phone Call icon. If the call is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. If the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. 5 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. English call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 8 Press to end the call. 9 Do one of the following:

If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

89 English A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the last two steps or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 5.9.5.2 Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Button Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls with the programmable button. 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. 90 Enter the access code and press the proceed. button to The green LED lights up. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, and call status. If the call-setup is successful:

The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, Phone Call, and call status. If call-setup is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 3 Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call. Do one of the following:

Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The display shows Extra Digits:

and a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and button to proceed. The DTMF tone press the sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 5 Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:. Enter the deaccess code and press the to proceed. button The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. English If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 and step 5 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. NOTICE:

During channel access, press the call attempt and a tone sounds. to dismiss During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. 91 English 5.9.5.3 Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Press OK to Place Call. If the selected entry is empty:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 1 2 92 The display shows Phone Call Invalid #. 4 5 Press select. or to Call Phone. Press to The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured. Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The display shows Calling, subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If the call is successful:

The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows the subscriber alias or ID, the Phone Call icon, and Phone Call. If the call is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 6 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The RSSI icon disappears. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 8 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 9 Press to end the call. English 10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-

Access Code:, and press to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 9 and step 10, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 93 English 5.9.5.4 Making Phone Calls by Using the Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the alias search. Press button or to exit alias search. Press to access the menu. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 5 6 Press select. or to Call Phone. Press to The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination ID, call type, and Phone Call icon. NOTICE:

To make a call to the required alias, press

. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. 8 Release the PTT button to listen. The display shows a blinking cursor. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. 1 2 94 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 5.9.5.5 Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. Press select. or to Manual Dial. Press to English 4 5 6 Press select. or to Phone Number. Press to The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor. Enter the telephone number, and press proceed. to The display shows Access Code: and a blinking cursor if the access code was not preconfigured. to proceed. Enter the access code, and press The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Phone Call icon, subscriber alias, and call status. If the call is successful:

The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. 95 English The display shows subscriber alias and the 10 Phone Call icon. If the call is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 7 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 8 Release the PTT button to listen. 9 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 96 Press to end the call. 11 Do one of the following:

If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 10, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Follow the procedure to initiate DTMF calls on your radio. The green LED blinks. 5.9.5.6 Dual Tone Multi Frequency The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows your radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to the telephone systems. Disabling all radio tones and alert will automatically turn off the DTMF tone. 5.9.5.6.1 Initiating DTMF Calls 1 Press and hold the PTT button. 2 Do one of the following:

Enter the desired number to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. 5.9.5.7 English Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the receiving radio is unable to talkback or respond. The recipient user is also not allowed to end the All Call. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The display shows either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration and Phone Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 5.9.5.8 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:

97 English Call. The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to end the call. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 5.9.5.9 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone NOTICE:

Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call. The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call. Call. The green LED blinks. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The display shows Call Ended. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to end the call. 98 NOTICE:

Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call. The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 5.9.7 Call Preemption Call Preemption allows a radio to stop any in-progress voice transmission and initiate a priority transmission. With the Call Preemption feature, the system interrupts and preempts ongoing calls in instances where trunked channels are unavailable. Higher priority calls such as an Emergency Call or an All Call preempt the transmitting radio to accommodate the higher priority call. If no other Radio Frequency (RF) channels are available, an Emergency Call preempts an All Call as well. 5.9.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the following actions:

Press the Voice PTT button. Press the Emergency button. The receiving radio displays Call Interrupted. 5.9.8 Voice Interrupt Voice Interrupt allows the user to shut down an in-progress voice transmission. This feature uses reverse channel signaling to stop the in-

progress voice transmission of a radio, if the interrupting radio is configured to Voice Interrupt, and the transmitting radio is configured to be Voice Call Interruptible. The interrupting radio is then allowed to make a voice transmission to the participant in the stopped call. English 99 English The Voice Interrupt feature significantly improves the probability of successfully delivering a new transmission to the intended parties when a call is in progress. Voice Interrupt is accessible to the user only if this feature has been set up in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.9.8.1 Enabling Voice Interrupt Follow the procedure to initiate Voice Interrupt on your radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 To interrupt the transmission during an on-going call, press the PTT button. On the interrupted radio, the display shows Call Interrupted. The radio sounds a negative indicator tone until the PTT button is released. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

100 A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 5.10 Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.10.1 Call Queue 5.10.2 Priority Call When there are no resources available to process a call, Call Queue enables the call request to be placed in the system queue for the next available resources. Priority Call allows the system to preempt one of the ongoing non-priority calls and initiate the requested high priority call when all channels are busy. You hear a Call Queue Tone after pressing the PTT button and radio screen displays Call In Queue indicating that the radio has entered Call Queue State. The PTT button may be released once the Call Queue Tone is heard. If the call setup is successful, the following occur:

The green LED blinks. If enabled, the Talk Permit Tone sounds. The display shows the call type icon, ID or alias. With all channels occupied with high priority calls, the system does not preempt any calls, and places the requesting high-priority call into call queue. If the system fails to place the requesting high-priority call into call queue, it declares failure. The default settings for Priority Call are preconfigured. Press the programmable button to toggle between normal and high priority level. When you use the following features, the call priority level reverts automatically to the preconfigured setting. The radio user has up to 4 seconds to press the PTT button to begin voice transmission. All voice calls If the call setup is unsuccessful, the following occur:

DMR Text Message/Text Message If enabled, the Reject Tone sounds. The display shows the failure notice screen momentarily. Job Ticket Remote monitor The following are the types of Priority Call:

The call is terminated and the radio exits the call setup. High Priority The radio displays Next Call: High Priority. English 101 English 5.10.3.1 102 Call Priority High icon appears at the top of your radio display. Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: High Priority. Turning Talkgroup Scan On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talkgroup Scan on or off on your radio. Normal Priority The radio displays Next Call: Normal Priority. Call Priority High icon disappears. Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: Normal Priority. 1 2 5.10.3 Talkgroup Scan This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined by a Receive Group List. When scan is enabled, your radio unmutes to any member in its Receive Group List. When scan is disabled, your radio does not receive transmission from any members of the Receive Group List, except for All Call, Permanent Talkgroup, and the selected Talkgroup. Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. 3 Do one of the following:

Press select. Press select. or to Turn On. Press to or to Turn Off. Press to If scan is enabled:

The display shows Scan On and Scan icon. The yellow LED blinks. A positive indicator tone sounds. If scan is disabled:

The display shows Scan Off. The Scan icon disappears. The LED turns off. A negative indicator tone sounds. 5.10.4 Receive Group List Receive Group List is a feature that allows you to create and assign members on the talkgroup scan list. This list is created when your radio is programmed and it determines which groups can be scanned. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in this list. If your radio has been programmed to edit the scan list, you can:

Add/remove talkgroups. Add, remove, and/or edit priority for talkgroups. Refer to Editing Priority for a Talkgroup on page 104. Add, remove, and/or edit affiliation talkgroups. Refer to Adding Talkgroup Affiliation on page 105 and Removing Talkgroup Affiliation on page 106. Replace the existing scan list with a new scan list. English If a talkgroup is programmed as Permanent Talkgroup, you are unable to edit the talkgroup from the scan list. IMPORTANT:

To add member into the list, the talkgroup must first be configured in the radio. NOTICE:

Receive Group List is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.10.5 Priority Monitor The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmission from talkgroups with higher priority even when radio is in a talkgroup call. Radio leaves lower priority talkgroup call for higher priority talkgroup call. NOTICE:

This feature can only be accessed when Talkgroup Scan feature is enabled. Priority Monitor feature applies only to members in the Receive Group List. There are two Priority Talkgroups:

Priority 1 (P1) and Priority 2 (P2). P1 has higher priority 103 English than P2. In Capacity Max system, the radio receives transmission according to the priority order below:

1 Emergency Call for P1 Talkgroup 2 Emergency Call for P2 Talkgroup 3 Emergency Call for Non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List 4 All Call 5 P1 Talkgroup Call 6 P2 Talkgroup Call 7 Non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List See Editing Priority for a Talkgroup on page 104 for more information on how to add, remove, and/or edit the priority of the talkgroups in the scan list. NOTICE:

This feature is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.10.5.1 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup In the Talkgroup Scan Menu, you can view or edit the priority of a talkgroup. 104 1 2 3 5 Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press select. or to View/Edit List. Press to 4 Press or to the required talkgroup. Press to select. The current priority is indicated by a Priority 1 or Priority 2 icon beside the talkgroup. Press select. or to Edit Priority. Press to 6 Press or to the required priority level. Press to select. If another talkgroup has been assigned to Priority 1 or Priority 2, you can choose to overwrite the current priority. When the display shows Overwrite Existing?, press to the following options:

or No to return to the previous step. Yes to overwrite. Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon appears beside the talkgroup. Press select. or to View/Edit List. Press to 5.10.6 Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation Your radio can be configured for up to seven talkgroups at a site. Of the 16 talkgroups in the Receive Group List, up to seven talkgroups can be assigned as affiliation talkgroups. The selected talkgroup and the priority talkgroups are automatically affiliated. 5.10.6.1 Adding Talkgroup Affiliation Follow the procedure to add a talkgroup affiliation. 4 Press or to the required talkgroup ID or alias. Press to select. The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit List. The display shows talkgroup ID or alias. beside the selected Press to select. or to Edit Affiliation. Press 6 Do one of the following:

Press or to On. Press to select. 1 2 3 5 English 105 Press or to Off. Press to select. Press to access the menu. English When On is selected, talkgroup ID or alias. appears beside the If affiliation is successful, the display shows selected talkgroup ID or alias. beside the If affiliation is unsuccessful, ID or alias. remains beside the talkgroup NOTICE:

The radio displays List Full when a maximum of seven talkgroups are selected for affiliation in the scan list. To select a new talkgroup for affiliation, remove an existing affiliated talkgroup to make way for the new addition. See Removing Talkgroup Affiliation on page 106 for more information. 5.10.6.2 Removing Talkgroup Affiliation When the affiliation list is full and you want to select a new talkgroup for affiliation, remove an existing affiliated talkgroup to make way for the new addition. Follow the procedure to remove a talkgroup affiliation. 106 1 2 3 5 Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press select. or to View/Edit List. Press to 4 Press or to the required talkgroup ID or alias. Press to select. The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit List. The display shows talkgroup ID or alias. beside the selected Press to select. or to Edit Affiliation. Press 6 Press or to Off. Press to select. When Off is selected, talkgroup ID or alias. disappears from beside the Talkback Enabled If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. English 5.10.7 Talkback The Talkback feature allows you to respond to a transmission while scanning. If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Talkback Disabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. NOTICE:

If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and the call ends, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. 5.10.8 Bluetooth This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-

enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32 ft) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of 107 English reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate the radio and the accessory. 5.10.8.1 Turning Bluetooth On and Off 1 2 3 At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-

establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10 m range. Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, a sensor device, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-

enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device. Your radio connects to the Bluetooth-enabled device within range with either the strongest signal strength, or to one which it has connected to before in a prior session. Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press the home back button operation as this cancels the operation. during the finding and connecting 108 Follow the procedure to turn Bluetooth on and off. Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to My Status. Press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

Press or display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. The Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 5.10.8.2 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices 5 Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Press or to Connect. Press to select. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device. The display shows Connecting to <Device>. Press or to Devices. Press to select. The display shows beside the connected device. Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 Do one of the following:

Press or to the required device. Press to select. Press or to Find Devices to locate available devices. Press or to the required device. Press to select. Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. English 109 English 5.10.8.3 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices in discoverable mode. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. or to Find Me. Press Press The radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. to select. Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. 1 2 3 110 The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. The display shows beside the connected device. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 5.10.8.4 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select. 4 5 Press to select. Press select. or to the required device. Press or to Disconnect. Press to Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device. The display shows Disconnecting from

<Device>. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. English Wait for acknowledgment. A tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears. The disappears beside the connected device. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 5.10.8.5 The display shows one of the following results:

A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Radio. Bluetooth. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 5.10.8.6 Viewing Device Details Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. 111 Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select. or to the required device. Press or to the required device. Press Press to select. or to View Details. Press to Press or to Edit Name. Press to select. 2 3 4 5 6 This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 5.10.8.7 Editing Device Name Follow the procedure to edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled devices. Enter a new device name. Press to select. The display shows Device Name Saved. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 5.10.8.8 Deleting Device Name Press to access the menu. You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. Press to select. Press select. English 2 3 4 5 1 112 English Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select. or to BT Mic Gain. Press to Press to select. or to the required device. Press 4 Press or to the BT Mic Gain type and the 1 2 3 Press select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press The display shows Device Deleted. to Delete. Press or to select. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 5.10.8.9 Adjusting Bluetooth Mic Gain Values Allows control of microphone gain value in connected Bluetooth-enabled devices. current values. To edit values, press to select. 5 Press or to increase or to decrease values. Press to select. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 5.10.8.10 Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode must be enabled by the dealer or system administrator. 113 NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. If enabled, Bluetooth is not displayed in the Menu and you cannot use any Bluetooth programmable button features. Turning Indoor Location On or Off You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions. Access this feature through the menu. Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your radio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode enables dedicated devices to use your radio position in the process of Bluetooth-based location. 5.10.9 Indoor Location NOTICE:

Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Indoor Location is use to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. or to Bluetooth and press to c. Press or to Indoor Location and press to select. d. Press to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. English 5.10.9.1 114 If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. e. Press to turn off Indoor Location. to turn off Indoor Location. b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. Access this feature by using the programmed button. a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. English 115 English 5.10.9.2 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information. Press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to My Tasks folder 3 Press or to Indoor Location and press Shared Tasks folder or to Beacons and press to The display shows the beacons information. 1 2 4 Press select. Press select. to select. 5.10.10 116 Job Tickets This feature allows your radio to receive messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks to perform. NOTICE:

This feature can be customized through the Customer Programming Software (CPS) according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two folders that contain different Job Tickets:

Personalized Job Tickets assigned to your signed in user ID. Shared Job Tickets assigned to a group of individuals. You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All, New, Started, and Completed. Job Tickets are retained even after the radio is turned off and turned on again. All Job Tickets are located in the All folder. Depending on how your radio is programmed, Job Tickets are sort by their priority level followed by time received. New Job Tickets, Job Tickets with recent changes in state, and Job Tickets with the highest priority are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 or 500 Job Tickets, depending on your radio model. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio automatically detects and discards duplicated Job Tickets with the same Job Ticket ID. Depending on the importance of the Job Tickets, the dispatcher adds a Priority Level to them. There are three priority levels: Priority 1, Priority 2, and Priority 3. Priority 1 has the highest priority and Priority 3 has the lowest priority. There are also Job Tickets with no priority. Your radio updates accordingly when dispatcher makes the following changes:

Modify content of Job Tickets. Add or edit Priority Level of Job Tickets. Move Job Tickets from folder to folder. Canceling of Job Tickets. 5.10.10.1 English Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Follow the procedure to access the Job Ticket folder. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to or to the required folder. Press to 4 Press or to the required Job Ticket. Press to select. 117 5.10.10.2 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server 5.10.10.3 Creating Job Tickets This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID. Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which are based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. CPS programming software is required to configure the Job Ticket template. Press to access the menu. Press or to Log In. Press to select. If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. Press to access the menu. or to Job Tickets. Press to 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Create Ticket. Press to 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. English 1 2 118 5.10.10.4 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Ticket. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

1 Use the keypad to type the required room number. A negative indicator tone sounds. Press to select. The display shows a negative mini notice. Press select. Press to select. 2 3 4 or to Room Status. Press to or to the required option. Press 5.10.10.5 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Tickets. Press or to Send. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 1 Press to select. or to the required option. Press English 119 The display shows a positive mini notice. to select. Press or to Send. Press to select. or to Job Tickets. Press to English 2 The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 5.10.10.6 Responding to Job Tickets Follow the procedure to respond to job tickets on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 120 Press select. Press select. 2 3 5 or to the required folder. Press to 4 Press or to the required job ticket. Press Press once more to access the sub-menu. You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to Quick Reply. 6 Press or to the required job ticket. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. English or to Job Tickets. Press to or to the required folder. Press to Press or to All folder. Press to select. 5 Press or to the required Job Ticket. Press 5.10.10.7 Deleting Job Tickets Follow the procedure to delete job tickets on your radio. to select. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 4 Press to access the menu. Press again while viewing the Job Ticket. Press or to Delete. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

121 Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 6 7 English A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. or to the required folder. Press to Press or to All folder. Press to select. or to Delete All. Press to 5.10.10.8 Deleting All Job Tickets Follow the procedure to delete all job tickets on your radio. 6 Do one of the following:

1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. or to Job Tickets. Press to 5.10.11 Multi-Site Controls These features are applicable when your current radio channel is configured to a Capacity Max system. 2 Press select. 122 5.10.11.1 Enabling Manual Site Search 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Site Roaming. Press to The display shows Out of Range. English 5 Press select. or to Active Search. Press to A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Finding Site. If the radio finds a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

A positive tone sounds. The LED extinguishes. The display shows Site <Alias> Found. If the radio fails to find a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

A negative tone sounds. The LED extinguishes. If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to connect to it, your radio shows the following indications:

A negative tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows Channel Busy. 123 English 5.10.11.2 Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Info. Press to or to Neighbor Sites. Press to This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled when your radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time, the following occurs periodically:

The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. 5.10.12 Home Channel Reminder The display shows Site Unlocked. 5.10.11.3 Accessing Neighbor Sites List This feature allows the user to check the adjacent sites list of the current home site. Follow the procedure to access the Neighbor Sites List:

sound. 124 The display shows Non Home Channel. 5.10.12.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can temporarily mute the reminder. Press the programmed Silence Home Channel Reminder button. The display shows HCR Silenced. 5.10.12.2 Setting New Home Channels When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button to set the current channel as the new Home Channel. Skip the following steps. The first line of the display shows the channel alias and the second line shows New Home Ch. English Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Home Channel. Press to 5 Press or to the desired new home channel alias. Press to select. The display shows channel alias. beside the selected home 5.10.13 Remote Monitor This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a target radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use this feature 125 English to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. If initiated, the green LED blinks once on the target radio. This feature automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. 5.10.13.1 Initiating Remote Monitor Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 126 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 5.10.13.2 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The display shows a negative mini notice. A negative indicator tone sounds. English 2 4 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press select. or to Remote Mon.. Press to The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

5.10.13.3 Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press to 127 English 5 Do one of the following:

If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press The display shows a negative mini notice. to proceed. proceed. 6 Press select. Edit the previously dialed ID, and press to 5.10.14 Contacts Settings or to Remote Mon.. Press to Contacts provides address book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. Each entry, depending on context, associates with the different call types: Group Call, Private Call, Broadcast Call, Site All Call, Multi-site All Call, PC Call, or Dispatch Call. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. 128 PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for further details. Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. NOTICE:

You see a checkmark before each number key that is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Empty, you have not assign a number key to the entry. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Type Call Alias Call ID NOTICE:

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Calls, Private Calls, All Calls, and Phone Calls on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able to decrypt the transmission. 5.10.14.1 Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys Follow the procedure to assign entries to programmable number keys on your radio. English Press to access the menu. 1 2 4 Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press select. or to Program Key. Press to 5 Do one of the following:

If the desired number key has not been assigned to an entry, press to the desired or number key. Press to select. If the desired number key has been assigned to an entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first text line shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:

Press or to Yes. Press to select. 129 English The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved and a positive mini notice. or to No to return to the previous Press step. 5.10.14.2 Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys Follow the procedure to remove the associations between entries and programmable number keys on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4. Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 2 130 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press select. or to Program Key. Press to Press or to Empty. Press to select. The first text line shows Clear from all keys. 4 5 6 Press or to Yes. Press to select. NOTICE:

When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Contact Saved. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 5.10.14.3 Adding New Contacts Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio. to select. 7 Press or to the required ringer type. Press 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. Press select. or to New Contact. Press to 4 Press or to select contact type Radio Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select. 5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. 5.10.15 Call Indicator Settings This feature allows you to configure call or text message ringing tones. 5.10.15.1 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls Press to access the menu. 1 2 6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press Press or to Utilities. Press to select. to proceed. to proceed. English 131 English 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show beside Off. or to Tones/Alerts. Press to 5.10.15.2 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages or to Call Ringers. Press to Press to access the menu. or to Private Call. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Tones/Alerts. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press to 7 Do one of the following:

Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows and the selected tone. Press or to Off. Press to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows beside Off. 132 English or to Text Message. Press to Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts The display shows and the current tone. Press to access the menu. Press select. 6 7 Press or to Messages. Press to select. The display shows and the current tone. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 8 Do one of the following:

or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows and the selected tone. Press or to Off. Press to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show beside Off. 5.10.15.3 or to Tones/Alert. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press to or to Call Alert. Press to 7 Do one of the following:

133 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press select. English Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows and the selected tone. Press or to Off. Press to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show beside Off. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Tones/Alert. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press to Press select. Press select. Press select. 3 4 5 6 7 5.10.15.4 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 1 2 134 Press or to Telemetry. Press to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. Press select. A or to the required tone. Press appears beside the selected tone. to 5.10.15.5 Assigning Ring Styles The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a English Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact.The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. 6 Press select. or to the required tone. Press to The display shows a positive mini notice. Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 5.10.15.6 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Follow the procedure to escalate alarm tone volume on your radio. Press or to View/Edit. Press to select. Press to access the menu. Press until display shows Ringer menu Press or to Utilities. Press to select. A indicates the current selected tone. 1 2 3 1 2 4 5 Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 135 English 4 6 Press select. or to Tones/Alert. Press to 5.10.16.1 Viewing Recent Calls 5 Press or to Escalert. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press enabled, disappears beside Enabled. to enable OR disable Escalert. If appears beside Enabled. If disabled, Press or to Call Log. Press to select. 3 Press or to the preferred list. The options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists. 5.10.16 Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. The call log feature is used to view and manage recent calls. Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs, depending on the system configuration on your radio. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

Store Alias or ID to Contacts Delete Call View Details 136 Press to select. The display shows the most recent entry. 4 Press or to view the list. You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is currently showing by pressing the PTT button. 5.10.16.2 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio from the Call list. Press to access the menu. Press or to Call Log. Press to select. 5.10.16.3 Deleting Calls from the Call List Follow the procedure to delete calls on your radio from the Call list. or to the required list. Press to Press to access the menu. 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Press or to Call Log. Press to select. 1 2 3 1 2 3 5 Press select. to select. Press or to Store. Press to select. The display shows a blinking cursor. 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. Press to select. You can store an ID without an alias. The display shows a positive mini notice. or to the required list. Press to Press select. If the list is empty:

A tone sounds. The display shows List Empty. 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. English 137 English 5 Press select. or to Delete Entry?. Press to or to the required list. Press to 6 Do one of the following:

4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Press to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted. to select. Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. or to View Details. Press to The display shows the details. 3 5 Press select. Press select. 5.10.16.4 Viewing Details from the Call List Follow the procedure to view details on your radio from the Call list. 5.10.17 Call Alert Operation Press to access the menu. Press or to Call Log. Press to select. 1 2 138 Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu by using Contacts, manual dial, or a programmed One Touch Access button. In Capacity Max, the Call Alert feature allows a radio user or a dispatcher to send an alert to another radio user requesting the radio user to call back the initiating radio user when available. Voice communication is not involved in this feature. The Call Alert Operation can be configured by the dealer or the system administrator in two ways:

The radio is configured to allow you to press the PTT button to respond directly to the call initiator by making a Private Call. The radio is configured to allow you to press the PTT button and continue with other Talkgroup communication. Pressing the PTT button on the call alert entry will not allow the user to respond to the call initiator. The user must navigate to the Missed Call Log option at the Call Log menu and respond to the Call Alert from there. An Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU) private call allows the user to respond immediately while a Full Off Air Call Set-Up

(FOACSU) private call requires user acknowledgment for the call. OACSU type calls are therefore, recommended being used for the Call Alert feature. See Private Call on page 78. 5.10.17.1 Making Call Alerts English 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. 5.10.17.2 Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Do one of the following:

139 Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio. Select the subscriber alias or ID directly Press or to the required alias or ID. If the acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. English Press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu or to Manual Dial . Press or to Radio Number . Press Press to select. Press to select. The display shows Radio Number: and a blinking cursor. Enter the subscriber ID you want to page. Press to select. 4 Press select. or to Call Alert. Press to The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If the acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. 140 5.10.17.3 Responding to Call Alerts When you receive a Call Alert:

A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:

Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller. Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log. See Notification List on page 187 and Call Log Features on page 136 for more information. 2 5.10.18 Dynamic Caller Alias This feature allows you to dynamically edit a Caller Alias from your radio front panel. When in a call, the receiving radio displays the Caller Alias of the transmitting radio. The Caller Aliases list can store up to 500 Caller Aliases of transmitting radio. You can view or make Private Calls from the Caller Aliases list. When you turn off your radio, the history of receiving Caller Aliases is removed from the Caller Aliases list. 5.10.18.1 Editing Your Caller Alias After Turning On the Radio English Enter your new Caller Alias. Press to proceed. The display shows a positive mini notice. NOTICE:

When in a call, the receiving radio displays your new Caller Alias. 5.10.18.2 Editing Your Caller Alias from the Main Menu Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 1 Turn on your radio. Press select. or to Radio Info.. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press or to My ID. Press to select. 141 Press to proceed. or to Caller Aliases. Press to English 5 6 7 1 142 Press or to Edit. Press to select. Enter your new Caller Alias. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. NOTICE:

When in a call, the receiving radio displays your new Caller Alias. 5.10.18.3 Viewing the Caller Aliases List You can access the Caller Aliases list to view the transmitting Caller Alias details. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 1 2 or to the preferred list. Press to or to View Details. Press to 5.10.18.4 Initiating Private Call From the Caller Aliases List You can access the Caller Aliases list to initiate Private Call. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Caller Aliases. Press to or to the <required Caller Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. 4 To call, press and hold the PTT button. 3 Press Alias>. 5.10.19 Mute Mode Do one of the following:

Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. Access this feature by placing the radio in a face-

down position momentarily. Depending on radio model, the Face Down feature can be enabled either through the radio menu or by your system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. IMPORTANT:

User can only enable either Man Down or Face Down at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio indicators on your radio. When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, your radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. IMPORTANT:

You can only enable either Face Down or Man Down one at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e, XPR 7350e/XPR 7380e only. Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode On. 5.10.19.1 The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:

English 143 English Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen. Radio is muted. that is configured. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration 5.10.19.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range between 0.56 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the radio is moved to a face-up position or the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 1 2 144 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Mute Timer. Press to 5 Press or to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press

. 5.10.19.3 Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:

Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. Place the radio in a face-up position momentarily. The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:

Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode Off. The blinking red LED turns off. Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. Short Press If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. Long Press English respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-emergency voice. Your dealer or system administrator can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. NOTICE:

Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. 5.10.20 Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even when there is activity on the current channel. In Capacity Max, the receiving radio can only support a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm. When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or NOTICE:

If short press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then long press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If long press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then short press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Alarm 145 English Regular Silent Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow In addition, each alarm has the following types:

Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over and/or you press the PTT button. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker. If hot mic is enabled, the incoming calls sound through the speaker after the programmed hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators only appear once you press the PTT button. NOTICE:

Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button. 5.10.20.1 146 Sending Emergency Alarms This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your radio. Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. You see one of these results:

The display shows Tx Alarms and the destination alias. destination alias. The display shows Tx Telegram and the The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. NOTICE:

If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed by the dealer or system administrator. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The Emergency tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:

A tone sounds. The display shows Alarm Failed. English The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:

When configured for Emergency Alarm only, the emergency process consists only of the Emergency Alarm delivery. The emergency ends when an acknowledgment is received from the system, or when channel access attempts have been exhausted. No voice call is associated with the sending of an Emergency Alarm when operating as Emergency Alarm Only. 5.10.20.2 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Call to a group of radios or a dispatcher. Upon acknowledgment by the infrastructure within the group, a group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. The radio must be configured for Emergency Alarm and Call to perform an emergency call after the alarm process. 147 English 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The Emergency icon appears.The green LED lights up. NOTICE:

If your radio is programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is successfully received:

The Emergency tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. Your radio enters the Emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias. If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is not successfully received:

All retries are exhausted. A low-pitched tone sounds. 148 The display shows Alarm Failed. The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. The green LED lights up.The display shows the Group Call icon. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The display shows the caller and group aliases. 5 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 6 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not hear a Talk Permit tone. Your radio dealer or system administrator can provide more information on how your radio has been programmed for Emergency. The Emergency Call initiator may press to end an on-going emergency call. The radio returns to a call idle state but the emergency call screen remains open. 5.10.20.3 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate English with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the speaker. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode. If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. NOTICE:

Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 149 English Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with voice to follow on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. You see one of these results:

The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. 3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. 5.10.20.4 Receiving Emergency Alarms The receiving radio can only support a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm. Follow the procedure to receive and view Emergency Alarms on your radio. When you receive an Emergency Alarm:

2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. A tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The radio automatically stops transmitting when:

The cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle 1 Mode is disabled. The display shows the Emergency Alarm List, the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. Press to view the alarm. 150 2 3 4 Press the entry in the Alarm List. to view the action options and details of Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm list. The radio returns to the home screen with an Emergency Icon displayed at the top, indicating the unresolved Emergency Alarm. The Emergency Icon disappears once the entry in the Alarm List is deleted. Press to access the menu. 5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list. 6 The tone sounds and the red LED blinks until you exit the Emergency mode. However, the tone can be silenced. Do one of the following:

Press the PTT button to call the group of radios which received the Emergency Alarm. Press any programmable button. English 5.10.20.5 Responding to Emergency Alarms When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-emergency voice. Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms on your radio. 1 If the Emergency Alarm Indication is enabled, the Emergency Alarm List appears when the radio receives an Emergency Alarm. Press the required alias or ID. or to 2 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm targeted. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 151 English Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The Emergency Call Tone sounds if the Emergency Call Indication and Emergency Call Decode Tone is enabled. The Emergency Call Tone will not sound if only the Emergency Call Indication is enabled. When the emergency initiating radio responds:

The display shows the Emergency Call icon at the top The red LED blinks. right corner. The display shows the Emergency Call icon, the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. The text line shows the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. NOTICE:

If the Emergency Call Indication is not enabled, the display shows the Group Call icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. 5.10.20.6 Responding to Emergency Alarms with Call Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms with Call on your radio. When you receive an Emergency Call:

152 1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds:

The red LED blinks. The display shows the Emergency Call icon, the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. NOTICE:

If the Emergency Call Indication is not enabled, the display shows the Group Call icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. 5.10.20.7 Exiting Emergency Mode Press the programmed Emergency Off button. Your radio shows the following indications:

The tone ceased. The red LED extinguished. When acknowlegment is received, the display of the transmitting radio shows Cancel Emer Success. If no acknowledgement is received, the display shows Cancel Emer Failed. English NOTICE:

If the Cancel Emergency configuration is enabled on the transmitting radio, the emergency alarm in your receiving radio will cease and the status is added to the Alarm List of the receiving radio. 5.10.21 Status Message This feature allows the user to send status messages to other radios. The Quick Status list is configured by using CPS-RM and comprises up to a maximum of 99 statuses. The maximum length for each status message is 16 characters. NOTICE:

Every status has a corresponding digital value ranging from 099. An alias can be specified to each status for ease of reference. 5.10.21.1 Sending Status Messages Follow the procedure below to send a status message. 153 English 2 3 Press select. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Skip the following steps. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. The display shows beside the sent status message. Press to access the menu. A negative indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

The LED turns off. Press or to Status. Press to select. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. or to Quick Status. Press to 4 Press or to the required status message. Press to select. 5.10.21.2 Sending Status Message by Using Programmable Button Follow the procedure to send a status message by using the programmable button. 5 Press or to the required subscriber alias or 1 Press the programmed Status Message button. ID, or group alias or ID. Press to select. 2 Press or to the required status message. Press to select. The contact list is displayed. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. 154 3 Press or to the required subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID. Press to select. Press to access the menu. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required subscriber alias or The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily ID, or group alias or ID. Press to select. before returning to the Quick Status screen. The display shows beside the sent status message. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. Press select. or to Send Status. Press to 5 Press or to the required status message. 1 2 4 The display shows the failure notice momentarily before Press to select. returning to the Quick Status screen. 5.10.21.3 Sending a Status Message by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to send a status message by using the contacts list. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. The display shows beside the sent status message. English 155 The display shows the failure notice momentarily before 5 Enter the required subscriber alias or ID, or group English If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. returning to the Quick Status screen. 5.10.21.4 Sending Status Message by Using Manual Dial Follow the procedure to send a status message by using the manual dial. Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 156 or to Radio Number. Press to 4 6 Press select. Press select. alias or ID, and press to proceed. or to Send Status. Press to 7 Press or to the required status message. Press to select. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. The display shows beside the sent status message. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The LED turns off. Press select. or to Manual Dial. Press to The LED turns off. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. Received status messages can also be viewed by accessing the Notification List. See Notification List on page 187 for more information. 5.10.21.5 Viewing Status Messages Follow the procedure to view status messages. 5.10.21.6 Responding to Status Messages Follow the procedure to reply status messages. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press or to Status. Press to select. Press or to Status. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. 4 Press or to the required status message. 4 Press or to the required status message. Press to select. The content of the status message is displayed to the radio user. Press to select. The content of the status is displayed. Press select. to 1 2 3 5 English 157 Press or to Reply. Press to select. 7 Press or to the required status message. Deleting a Status Message Follow the procedure to delete a status message from your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Status. Press to select. Press to select. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice before returning to the Inbox screen. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. The display shows beside the sent status message. 4 Press or to the required status message. Press to select. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Inbox screen. The content of the status is displayed. Press select. to Press or to Delete. Press to select. 1 2 3 5 6 English 6 5.10.21.7 158 Press or to Yes. Press to select. Press or to Yes. Press to select. 5 The display shows a positive mini notice before The display shows List Empty. returning to the Inbox screen. English 7 1 2 3 4 5.10.21.8 Deleting All Status Messages Follow the procedure to delete all status messages from your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Status. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press select. or to Delete All. Press to 5.10.22 Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio

(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. NOTICE:

The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Contact your dealer for more information. 159 English 5.10.22.1 Text Messages The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted according to the most recently received. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Long press screen. at any time to return to the Home 5.10.22.1.1 Viewing Text Messages 4 Press or to the required message. Press to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. 5.10.22.1.2 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text message from the inbox. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press or to Messages. Press to select. Press or to Messages. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. If the Inbox is empty:

The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. to select. 4 Press or to the required message. Press 1 2 3 1 2 3 160 You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. 4 Press or to the required message. Press to select. Long press to return to the Home screen. 5.10.22.1.3 Viewing Saved Text Messages 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. 5.10.22.1.4 Responding to Text Messages When you receive a text message:

The display shows the Notification list with the alias or ID of the sender. The display shows the Message icon. NOTICE:

The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the message if the PTT button is pressed. Press to access the menu. 1 Do one of the following:

Press or to Messages. Press to select. Press or to Drafts. Press to select. Press or to Read. Press to select. The display shows the text message. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-

mail application. 5 2 3 English 161 English or to Read Later. Press Press select. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to receiving the text message. to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. 4 Press or to the required message. Press 3 5 to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to access the sub-menu. 6 Do one of the following:

Press or to Reply. Press to select. Press select. or to Quick Reply. Press to A blinking cursor appears. You can write or edit your message, if required. Press or to Delete. Press to select. 2 Press to return to the Inbox. 5.10.22.1.5 Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to Step 3. Press to access the menu. Press or to Messages. Press to select. 2 162 7 Press once message is composed. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming the message is being sent. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. 5.10.22.1.6 The display shows a positive mini notice. English Forwarding Text Messages When you are at the Resend option screen:

1 or Press the same message to another subscriber or group alias or ID. to Forward, and press to send 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 163 English 5.10.22.1.7 Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial The display shows a positive mini notice. A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. 1 2 3 4 Press or to Forward. Press to select. The display shows a negative mini notice. Press subscriber or group alias or ID. to send the same message to another 5.10.22.1.8 Editing Text Messages Select Edit to edit the message. Press select. or to Manual Dial. Press to The display shows Radio Number:. NOTICE:

If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. Press or to Edit. Press to select. 1 The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

164 The display shows a blinking cursor. 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. Press to move one space to the left. English Press or to move one space to the right. Sending Text Messages Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. It is assumed that you have a newly written text message or a saved text message. Select the message recipient. Do one of the following:

3 Press once message is composed. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press 4 Do one of the following:

to select. Press or the message. to Send and press to send Press or to Save and press to save the message to the Drafts folder. Press to edit the message. Press to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. 5.10.22.1.9 Press or to Manual Dial. Press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID. Press

. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

The display shows positive mini notice. 165 English A low tone sounds. The display shows negative mini notice. The message is moved to the Sent Items folder. The message is marked with a Send Failed icon. NOTICE:

For a newly written text message, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. 4 Press or to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. Press once message is composed. Do one of the following:

5.10.22.1.10 Editing Saved Text Messages Press or to Send. Press to send the message. Press

. Press or to choose between saving or deleting the message. Press select. to Press while viewing the message. Press or to Edit. Press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. 1 2 166 5.10.22.1.11 Resending Text Messages When you are at the Resend option screen:

Press same subscriber or group alias or ID. to resend the same message to the If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. English 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press or to Messages. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. If unsuccessful:

If the Inbox is empty:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows List Empty. The display shows a negative mini notice. A tone sounds. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. 4 Press or to the required message. Press 5.10.22.1.12 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete text messages from the Inbox on your radio. to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to access the sub-menu. 167 2 3 5 English 6 7 2 3 168 Press or to Delete. Press to select. A tone sounds. The display shows List Empty. Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. The screen returns to the Inbox. Press select. or to Delete All. Press to 5.10.22.1.13 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. 5.10.22.1.14 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder Press to access the menu. 1 Do one of the following:

Press or to Messages. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 4 5 2 If the Inbox is empty:

Press or to Messages. Press to select. 3 5 6 Press or to Drafts. Press to select. 4 Press or to the required message. Press to select. Press again while viewing the message. Press or text message. to Delete. Press to delete the 5.10.22.2 Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items folder. You can resend, forward, edit, or delete a Sent text message. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. English If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. If you long press Home screen. at any time, the radio returns to the NOTICE:

If the channel type, for example a conventional digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. 5.10.22.2.1 Viewing Sent Text Messages 1 Do one of the following:

169 English Press the programmed Text Message button. Sending Sent Text Messages Proceed to step 3. When you are viewing a Sent message:

Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. on. Press or to Messages. Press to select. or to Sent Items. Press to If the Sent Items folder is empty:

The display shows List Empty. A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned 4 Press or to the required message. Press to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press

. 1 2 Press or to Resend. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 167 for more information. 5.10.22.2.2 170 5.10.22.2.3 Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder Sending Quick Text Messages Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text messages on your radio to a predefined alias. Follow the procedure to delete sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. When you are viewing a Sent message:

1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming the message is being sent. Press or to Delete. Press to select. A positive indicator tone sounds. Press

. 1 2 5.10.22.3 Quick Text Messages Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. 5.10.22.3.1 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 167 for more information. English 171 English 5.10.23 Text Entry Configuration 5.10.23.1 Word Predict Your radio allows you to configure different text. You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:

Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

Word Predict Word Correct Sentence Cap My Words Numbers Symbols Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) NOTICE:

Press at any time to return to the previous screen or long press Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. to return to the Home 172 1 2 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities and press to 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. Press select. Press to select. or to Text Entry and press to or to Word Predict and press You can also use option. or to change the selected or to Radio Settings. Press to 6 Do one of the following:

Press shows beside Enabled. to enable Word Predict. The display Press to disable Word Predict. The disappears from beside Enabled. 5.10.23.2 Sentence Cap This feature is used to automatically enable capitalization of the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. English 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to Sentence Cap. Press to 6 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Sentence Cap. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Sentence Cap. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 173 English 5.10.23.3 Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into the in-built dictionary of your radio. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. Press select. or to List of Words. Press to The display shows the list of custom words. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 5.10.23.4 Editing Custom Words You can edit custom words saved in your radio. Press to access the menu. or to Text Entry. Press to or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to My Words. Press to select. or to Text Entry. Press to 6 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 174 5 6 7 8 Press select. Press select. Press or to My Words. Press to select. Press once your custom word is completed. or to List of Words. Press to Display shows the list of custom words. or to the required word. Press to The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. 5.10.23.5 Adding Custom Words Press or to Edit. Press to select. You can add custom words into the in-built radio dictionary. 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Press to move one space to the left. Press to access the menu. Press key to move one space to the right. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 10 1 2 3 English 175 or to Text Entry. Press to Press once your custom word is completed. English 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. 176 Press or to My Words. Press to select. or to Add New Word. Press to Display shows the list of custom words. 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Press to move one space to the left. Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. 8 1 2 3 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display show positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. 5.10.23.6 Deleting a Custom Word You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press key to move one space to the right. Press to access the menu. English or to Text Entry. Press to Deleting All Custom Words You can delete all custom words from the in-built dictionary of your radio. Press or to My Words. Press to select. Press to access the menu. or to the required word. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. Press select. 4 5 6 7 Press or to Delete. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No. Press to return to the previous screen. 5.10.23.7 or to Text Entry. Press to Press or to My Words. Press to select. or to Delete All. Press to 7 Do one of the following:

177 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. English 5.10.24 Privacy At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No to return to the previous screen. Press to select. This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-

based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled transmissions. Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID for Privacy as the transmitting radio. 178 If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all for Enhanced Privacy. On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning tone or not, depending on how it is programmed. The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and double blinks when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. NOTICE:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature, or may have a different configuration. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.10.24.1 Turning Privacy On or Off Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. Stun/Revive Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to Privacy. Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press or display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. The Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. 2 3 4 5.10.25 English This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, the dealer or system administrator may want to disable a stolen radio to prevent unauthorized users from using it, and enable the radio when it is recovered. A radio can be disabled (stunned) or enabled (revived) either through the console or through a command initiated by another radio. Once a radio is disabled, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the home screen shows Channel Denied. When a radio is stunned, the radio cannot request nor receive any user initiated services on the system that performed the Stun procedure. However, the radio can switch to another system. The radio continues to send GNSS location reports and can be monitored remotely when it was stunned. NOTICE:

The dealer or system administrator may permanently disable a radio. See Radio Kill on page 184 for more information. 179 Capacity Max 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Press to access the menu. English 5.10.25.1 Stunning a Radio Follow the procedure to disable a radio. 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. to select. The green LED blinks. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 5.10.25.2 180 Stunning a Radio by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to disable a radio by using the Contacts List. 1 2 4 Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Disable. Press to is pressed during the Radio Disable If operation, the radio does not receive an acknowledgment message. The display shows Radio Disable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED blinks. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. English Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Contact. Press to The first text line shows Radio Number:. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. 5.10.25.3 Stunning a Radio by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to disable a radio by using the manual dial. or to Radio Disable. Press to The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 181 7 Wait for acknowledgment. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The display shows a negative mini notice. 5.10.25.4 Reviving a Radio Follow the procedure to enable a radio. 5.10.25.5 Reviving a Radio by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to enable a radio by using the Contacts List. 1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. English 182 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4 Press select. or to Radio Enable. Press to The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. English Reviving a Radio by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to enable a radio by using the Manual Dial. Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. or to Manual Dial. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 183 If unsuccessful:

or to Private Call. Press to A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The first text line shows Radio Number:. 5.10.25.6 Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. English 6 Press select. or to Radio Enable. Press to The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. This feature is an enhanced security measure to restrict unauthorized access to a radio. 5.10.26 Radio Kill 184 Radio Kill causes a radio to be rendered inoperable. For example, the dealer may want to kill a stolen or misplaced radio to prevent unauthorized usage. When powered on, a killed radio displays Radio Killed on the screen momentarily to indicate the killed state. NOTICE:

A killed radio can only be revived at a Motorola Solutions service depot. Contact your dealer for more information. 5.10.27 Lone Worker This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the channel selector, for a predefined time. Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the inactivity timer expires. If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an emergency condition as programmed by the dealer. 5.10.28 Password Lock You can set a password to restrict access to your radio. Each time you turn on your radio, you are asked to enter the password. Your radio supports a 4-digit password input. Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. 5.10.28.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password 1 Enter the four-digit password. a To edit the numeric value of each digit, press or

. To enter and move to the next digit, press

. 2 Press to confirm the password. If you enter the password correctly, the radio powers up. English If you enter the wrong password after the first and second attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A continuous tone sounds. The display shows Wrong Password. Repeat step 1. If you enter the wrong password after the third attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Wrong Password and then, Radio Locked. NOTICE:

In locked state, your radio responds to inputs from the On/Off/Volume Control Knob and programmed Backlight button only. Wait for the 15-minute locked state timer to end and then repeat step 1. NOTICE:

If you turn off and turn your radio on again, the 15-

minute timer restarts. 185 Turn on your radio. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes. English 5.10.28.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state. Do one of the following:

If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 185 to access the radio. If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Radio Locked. Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 185 to access the radio. 5.10.28.3 Changing Passwords Follow the procedure to change passwords on your radio. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Passwd Lock. Press to Enter the current four-digit password, and press to proceed. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. Press select. or to Change PWD. Press to Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press to access the menu. Enter a new four-digit password, and press proceed. to 1 186 8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press to proceed. If successful, the display shows Password Changed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 5.10.29 Notification List Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The display shows the Notification icon when the Notification list has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When the list is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification list. English For text messages, missed calls, and call alert events, the maximum number of notifications are 30 text messages and 10 missed calls or call alerts. This maximum number depends on individual feature (job tickets or text messages or missed calls or call alerts) list capability. 5.10.29.1 Accessing Notification List Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Notification button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. or to Notification. Press to 187 Long press to return to the Home screen. When your radio powers up after automatic restart:

English 4 Press select. or to the required event. Press to 5.10.30 Over-the-Air Programming Your dealer can remotely update your radio by using Over-

the-Air Programming (OTAP) without physical connection. Additionally, some settings can also be configured by using OTAP. When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks. When your radio receives high volume data:

The display shows the High Volume Data icon. The channel becomes busy. A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button. When OTAP completes, depending on the configuration:

A tone sounds. The display shows Updating Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off and on again. 188 You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When you select Postpone, your radio returns to the previous screen. The display shows the OTAP Delay Timer icon until the automatic restart occurs. If successful, the display shows Sw Update Completed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Sw Update Failed. See Checking Software Update Information on page 221 for the updated software version. 5.10.31 Received Signal Strength Indicator This feature allows you to view the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) values. The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right corner. See Display Icons for more information on the RSSI icon. 5.10.31.1 Viewing RSSI Values At the home screen, press three times and immediately press

, all in 5 seconds. The display shows the current RSSI values. To return to the home screen, press and hold

. 5.10.32 Front Panel Programming You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Programming (FPP) to enhance the use of your radio. The following buttons are used as required while navigating through the feature parameters. Up/Down/Left/Right Navigation Button Press to navigate through options horizontally or vertically, or increase or decrease values. English Return/Home Button Short press to return to the previous menu or exit the selection screen. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. 5.10.32.1 Entering Front Panel Programming Mode 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Program Radio. Press to 5.10.32.2 Editing Mode Parameters Menu/OK Button Press to select the option or enter a sub-menu. Use the following buttons as required while navigating through the feature parameters. 189

, Scroll through options, increase/decrease values, or navigate vertically. Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. English Select the option or enter a sub-menu. Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen. 5.10.33 Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/

WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. 190 WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi remotely by using a designated radio (see Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) on page 191 and Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) on page 192). Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.10.33.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 1 Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. 2 Access this feature using the menu. a Press to access the menu. b Press select. c Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to WiFi On and press to English 5.10.33.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Individual Control

(One to One). NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Do one of the following:

Long press the programmable button. Use the keypad to enter the ID and press Proceed to step 4. to select. Press to access the menu. d Press to turn on/off Wi-Fi. If Wi-Fi is on, the display shows Enabled. beside If Wi-Fi is off, the Enabled. 2 Press select. disappears from beside or to Contacts and press to 191 English 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias:

Select the subscriber alias directly. Press or to the required subscriber alias or ID. Use the Manual Dial menu. Press or to Manual Dial and press to select. Select Radio Number and use the keypad to enter the ID. Press to select. Press to select. or to WiFi Control and press 5 Press or to select On or Off. Press to select. If successful, the display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. 4 6 192 5.10.33.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Group Control

(One to Many). NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to 3 Press or to select the required subscriber 1 2 4 Press select. alias or ID. Press to select. or to WiFi Control and press 5 Press or to select On or Off. Press to select. If successful, the display shows Sent Successfully. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. 5.10.33.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:

You can also connect to a network access point using the menu. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 6 1 Press to access the menu. English 2 3 Press select. Press or to WiFi and press to select. or to Networks and press to 4 Press or to a network access point and press to select. NOTICE:

For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network access point is not preconfigured, the Connect option is not available. or to Connect and press to 6 For WPA-Personal Wi-Fi, enter the password and 5 Press select. press

. 193 7 For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured by using RM. Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio automatically connects to the selected network access point. If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the display shows Authentication Failure, and automatically returns to the previous menu. If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically returns to the previous menu. 5.10.33.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is turned off. The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the radio is connected to a network. The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected to any network. Voice Announcements for the Wi-Fi status query results can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. English 194 5.10.33.6 Refreshing the Network List 5.10.33.7 Adding a Network Perform the following actions to refresh the network list through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. Press to access the menu. or to Networks and press to Press or to WiFi and press to select. b. Press select. c. Press select. When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. Press select. or to Refresh and press to The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. or to Networks and press to or to Add Network and press to 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. English 195 English 6 7 1 2 3 196 Press or to Open and press to select. Enter the password and press

. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the network is successfully saved. 5 Press to select. 5.10.33.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points You can view details of network access points. Press to access the menu. 4 Press or to a network access point and press to select. or to View Details and press NOTICE:

WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi display different details of Network Access Points. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID and Security Mode. For a connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2 Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2. Press or to WiFi and press to select. WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi Press select. or to Networks and press to For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name. 4 Press or to the selected network access point and press to select. English 5.10.33.9 Removing Network Access Points NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. Press select. or to Networks and press to 5 6 Press or to Remove and press to select. Press or to Yes and press to select. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the selected network access point is successfully removed. 5.10.34 Dynamic Group Number Assignment

(DGNA) Dynamic Group Number Assignment (DGNA) is a feature which allows the console to assign and remove a new talkgroup from your radio over the air. When the console assigns DGNA to your radio, your radio is in DGNA mode:

A tone sounds. 197 English The display shows <DGNA Talkgroup Alias>

Assigned momentarily before returning to the home screen. The DGNA icon appears in the status bar. The home screen displays DGNA talkgroup alias. When the console removes DGNA from your radio, your radio returns to the previous talkgroup:

A tone sounds. The display shows <DGNA Talkgroup Alias>

Removed momentarily before returning to the home screen. The DGNA icon disappears from the status bar. The home screen displays the previous talkgroup alias. Depending on how your radio is programmed, you can view, edit, and listen to the original scan lists channels and the non-DGNA talkgroups. When your radio is in DGNA mode, pressing the PTT button allows you to communicate only with the current DGNA talkgroup. To communicate with the previous non-

DGNA talkgroup, program the One Touch Access button. See Making Non-DGNA Calls on page 198. 198 NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 5.10.34.1 Making DGNA Calls When your radio is in DGNA mode, press the PTT button to make the call. A DGNA tone sounds. The display shows the DGNA icon and the DGNA talkgroup alias. NOTICE:

If your radio is not in DGNA mode and you press the One Touch Access button, your radio sounds a tone, indicating error. The display remains unchanged. 5.10.34.2 Making Non-DGNA Calls 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. A positive tone sounds. English Voice Announcement sounds One Touch The display shows the DGNA icon, DGNA talkgroup Replaced Call. alias, and radio alias. The display shows <Talkgroup Alias> and Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds Press PTT momentarily. through the speaker. NOTICE:

If your radio is not in DGNA mode and you press the One Touch Access button, your radio sounds a negative tone, indicating error. The display remains unchanged. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 2 Press PTT button before a negative tone sounds and your radio returns to the home screen. NOTICE:

When your radio is in the home screen, a PTT press makes call to the DGNA talkgroup. 5.10.34.3 Receiving and Responding to DGNA Calls When you receive a DGNA call:

A DGNA tone sounds. 5.11 Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. 5.11.1 Keypad Lock Options With this feature, you can avoid accidentally pressing buttons or changing channels when your radio is not in use. You can choose to either lock your keypad, channel selector knob, or both; depending on your requirements. Your dealer can use CPS/RM to configure one of the following options:

199 English Lock Keypad Lock Channel Selector Knob Lock Keypad and Channel Selector Knob Contact your dealer to determine how your radio has been programmed. 5.11.1.1 Enabling the Keypad Lock Option The following steps are applicable for either Lock Keypad, Lock Channel Selector Knob, or Lock Keypad and Channel Selector Knob option depending on how your radio has been configured. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Keypad Lock button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Keypad Lock. Press to The display shows Locked. 5.11.1.2 Disabling the Keypad Lock Option The following steps are applicable for either Lock Keypad, Lock Channel Selector Knob, or Lock Keypad and Channel Selector Knob option depending on how your radio has been configured. Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Keypad Lock button. When the display shows Menu then * To Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Unlock, press followed by

. The display shows Unlocked. 2 200 5.11.2 Turning Acoustic Feedback Suppressor On or Off The feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Follow the procedure to turn Acoustic Feedback Suppressor on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed AF Suppressor button. Skip the following steps. English 5 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. Suppressor. Press to disable Acoustic Feedback If enabled, disappears beside Enabled. appears beside Enabled. If disabled, Press to access the menu. 5.11.3 Identifying Cable Type Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Do the following steps to select the type of cable your radio uses. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press to access the menu. 1 2 or to AF Suppressor. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. 201 English Press select. Press select. 3 4 1 2 202 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Cable Type. Press to Press or to Display. Press to select. 5 Press or to change the selected option. or to Menu Timer. Press to The current cable type is indicated by a

. 5.11.4 Setting Menu Timer or to the required setting. Press You can set the time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. Follow the procedure to set the menu timer. 5.11.5 Text-to-Speech Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by your dealer. If Text-to-Speech is enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled. If Voice Announcement is enabled, then the Text-to-Speech feature is automatically disabled. This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the following features:

Current Channel Current Zone Programmed button feature on or off Content of received text messages Content of received Job Tickets This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This feature is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 5.11.5.1 Setting Text-to-Speech Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature. 1 2 3 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to English 4 Press or to Voice Announcement. Press to select. 5 Press or to any of the following features. Press to select. The available features are as follows:

All Messages Job Tickets Channel Zone Program Button 203 Press to access the menu. appears beside the selected setting. English 5.11.6 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). NOTICE:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to GNSS. Press to select. Press to enable or disable GNSS. If enabled, If disabled, appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. 2 Do one of the following steps to toggle GNSS on or off on your radio. Press the programmed GNSS button. Press to access the menu. Proceed to the next step. 5.11.7 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen by following the procedure. Press to access the menu. 1 204 3 4 5 6 1 Press or to Display. Press to select. 1 Do one of the following:

2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press Screen. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Intro Screen. Press to to enable or disable the Introduction The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. English Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. 205 5.11.8 or to Tones/Alerts. Press to Press or to All Tones. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to English 5 6 1 2 206 Press The display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable all tones and alerts. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 5.11.9 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. Follow the procedure to set the tones and alerts volume offset levels on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press to or to Vol. Offset. Press to 6 Press or to the required volume offset level. A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding volume offset level. 7 Do one of the following:

Press to select. The required volume offset level is saved. Press to exit. The changes are discarded. English 5.11.10 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on your radio. 6 Press Tone. Press to access the menu. to enable or disable the Talk Permit The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 5.11.11 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on your radio. or to Tones/Alerts. Press to Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Talk Permit. Press to 1 2 3 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 207 or to Tones/Alerts. Press to Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Press or to Power Up. Press to select. to select. Press The display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable the Power Up Tone. Press select. or to Message Alert. Press to If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 5 Do one of the following:

2 4 5.11.12 Setting Text Message Alert Tones You can customize the text message alert tone for each entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text message alert tones on your radio. Press to access the menu. or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to Momentary. Press to beside Momentary. to Repetitive. Press to beside Repetitive. English Press select. 4 5 6 1 208 English Press to access the menu. 5.11.13 Power Levels High Low You can customize the power setting to high or low for each channel. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. This enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to This enables communication with radios in closer proximity. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Press or to Power. Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press or to High. Press to select. The display shows beside High. 5.11.13.1 Setting Power Levels 1 Do one of the following:

the steps below. Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio. Press or to Low. Press to select. The display shows beside Low. Press the programmed Power Level button. Skip Long press to return to the Home screen. 2 3 4 6 209 English 5.11.14 Changing Display Modes You can change the display mode of the radio between Day or Night, as needed. This feature affects the color palette of the display. Follow the procedure to change the display mode of your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

5 Press to select. or to the required setting. Press The display shows beside the selected setting. 5.11.15 Adjusting Display Brightness Press the programmed Display Mode button. Skip the following steps. Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 Do one of the following:

Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 2 3 Press select. Press or to Display. Press to select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. or to Radio Settings. Press to 2 3 4 210 English 4 Press select. or to Brightness. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select. The display shows the progress bar. 5 Press or to decrease or increase the display Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to brightness. Press to select. Press or to Display. Press to select. 2 3 4 5 5.11.16 Setting Display Backlight Timer You can set the display backlight timer of the radio as needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. Follow the procedure to set the backlight timer on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press to select. or to Backlight Timer. Press The display backlight and keypad backlighting are automatically turned off as the LED indicator is disabled. See Turning LED Indicators On or Off on page 212 for more information. Press the programmed Backlight button. Skip the following steps. 5.11.17 Turning Backlight Auto On or Off Press to access the menu. You can enable and disable the backlight of the radio to turn on automatically as needed. If enabled, the backlight is turned on when the radio receives a call, Notification List event, or Emergency Alarm. 211 English 1 2 3 5 Press select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Radio Settings. Press to 4 Press or to Backlight Auto. Press to enable or disable Backlight Auto. The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. or to LED Indicator. Press to Press to enable or disable the LED indicator. The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 5.11.18 Turning LED Indicators On or Off Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on your radio. 5.11.19 Setting Languages Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio. 212 English 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to Languages. Press to select. 5 Press or to the required language. Press to select. Press the programmed Option Board button. 5.11.21 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the programmable button the user has just pressed. This is typically useful when the user has difficulty reading the content shown on the display. This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio. The display shows beside the selected language. 1 Do one of the following:

5.11.20 Turning Option Board On or Off Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio. 2 Press the programmed Voice Announcement button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 213 English 3 5 Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to audio. Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. 4 Press or to Voice Announcement. Press Press to access the menu. to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press AGC. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Mic AGC-D. Press to to enable or disable Digital Microphone The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press Announcement. to enable or disable Voice If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 5.11.22 Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on a digital system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of 214 5.11.23 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Wired Accessory Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and wired accessory. You can toggle audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory with the condition that:

The wired accessory with speaker is attached. English sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. Skip the steps below. Press the programmed Audio Toggle button. Press to access the menu. A tone sounds when the audio route has switched. Powering down the radio or detaching the accessory resets the audio routing to the internal radio speaker. 5.11.24 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise 2 3 Press select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 4 Press or to Intelligent Audio. Press to select. 215 English 5 Do one of the following:

Press or display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. The Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. 5.11.25 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill

(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 2 216 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Trill Enhance. Press to 5 Do one of the following:

Press or display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. The Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. 5.11.26 Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On or Off This feature allows you to enable the radio to automatically monitor the microphone input and adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio clipping. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. English Setting Audio Ambience Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your radio according to your environment. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Mic Distortion. Press to or to Radio Settings. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control. If enabled, Enabled. appears beside Press to disable Microphone Dynamic disappears Distortion Control. If disabled, beside Enabled. 5.11.27 or to Audio Ambience. Press to or to the required setting. Press The settings are as follows. Choose Default for the default factory settings. 217 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press to select. Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when using in noisy surroundings. Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback when using with a group of radios that are near to each other. The display shows beside the selected setting. 4 5 Press select. Press to select. 5.11.28 Setting Audio Profiles Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Audio Profiles. Press to or to the required setting. Press The settings are as follows. Choose Default to disable the previously selected audio profile and return to the default factory settings. Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-

induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over 40 years of age. Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost for audio profiles that align with your preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper sounds. The display shows beside the selected setting. English 1 2 3 218 5.11.29 General Radio Information Your radio contains information on various general parameters. The general information of your radio is as follows:

Accessing Battery Information Displays information of your radio battery. Press to access the menu. Firmware and Codeplug versions. Battery information. Radio alias and ID. Software update. GNSS information. Site information. Received Signal Strength Indicator. NOTICE:

Press to return to the previous screen. Long to return to the Home screen. The radio press exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. 5.11.29.1 English 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Info. Press to or to Battery Info. Press to NOTICE:

For IMPRES batteries only: The display reads Recondition Battery when the battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the reconditioning process, the display then shows the battery information. The display shows the battery information. 219 English NOTICE:

For non-supported battery, the display shows Unknown Battery. 5.11.29.2 Checking Radio Alias and ID 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button. Skip the following steps. A positive indicator tone sounds. You can press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to My Number. Press to select. The first text line shows the radio alias. The second text line shows the radio ID. 5.11.29.3 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to 4 1 2 3 4 Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to Press or to Versions. Press to select. The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. 2 3 220 English Press or to GNSS Info. Press to select. or to the required item. Press Press select. The display shows the requested GNSS information. to 5.11.29.5 Checking Software Update Information This feature shows the date and time of the latest software update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow the procedure to check the software update information on your radio. 5.11.29.4 Checking GNSS Information Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:

Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Satellites Version 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to 221 Press or to SW Update. Press to select. Press or to Site Info. Press to select. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. The display shows the current site name. Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-Air Programming on page 356 for more information. 5.11.29.6 Displaying Site Information 5.11.30 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate. Follow the procedure to display the current site name your radio is on. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to Press to select. or to Certificate Menu. Press appears beside ready certificates. 4 1 2 3 English 4 1 2 3 222 4 Press or to the required certificate. Press to select. Your radio displays the full details of the certificate. NOTICE:

For unready certificates, the display shows only Status. English 223 English Other Systems Features that are available to the radio users under this system are available in this chapter. 6.1 Push-To-Talk Button Programmable Buttons Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions. Short press Long press Pressing and releasing rapidly. The Push-to-Talk (PTT) button serves two basic purposes:

Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. Long press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. NOTICE:

See Emergency Operation on page 326 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. 6.3 Assignable Radio Functions The following radio functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Audio Profiles Audio Toggle Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Toggles audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory. 6.2 224 Bluetooth Audio Switch 4 Channel Announcement Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. Bluetooth Connect Bluetooth Disconnect Contacts Emergency Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Call Alert Indoor Location4 Toggles Indoor Location on or off. Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Manual Dial Initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID. Manual Site Roam 5 Starts the manual site search. Mic AGC Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control

(AGC) on or off. Call Forwarding Toggles Call Forwarding on or off. Call Log Selects the call log list. 4 Only applicable for XPR 7580e IS. 5 Not applicable in Capacity Plus. English 225 English Monitor Notifications Monitors a selected channel for activity. Provides direct access to the Notifications list. Nuisance Channel Delete5 Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the selected zone or channel combination of the user from which scan is initiated. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert, a Quick Text message, or Home Revert. Option Board Feature Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Permanent Monitor5 Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Radio Check Radio Enable Radio Disable Remote Monitor Determines if a radio is active in a system. Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Repeater/Talkaround5 Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Scan 6 Toggles scan on or off. Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Phone 226 6 Not applicable in Capacity PlusSingle-Site. Displays the current site name and ID of Capacity Plus-

Multi-Site. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is enabled. Site Info Site Lock5 When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Toggles VOX on or off. Wi-Fi4 Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Zone Selection Allows selection from a list of zones. 6.4 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. The following radio settings or utility functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Status Selects the status list menu. Telemetry Control Text Message Selects the text message menu. Voice Interrupt Interrupts the audio from a transmitting radio to free the channel. Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Tones/Alerts Backlight Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Toggles display backlight on or off. Backlight Brightness Adjusts the brightness level. Display Mode Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. English 227 English Keypad Lock Power Level Toggles keypad between locked and unlocked. Long press to return to the Home screen. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to the Home screen. 6.5 Accessing Programmed Functions 6.6 Status Indicators This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones used in the radio. Follow the procedure to access programmed functions in your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed button. Proceed to step 3. 6.6.1 Icons The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, Liquid Crystal Display

(LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to the menu function, and press to select a function or enter a sub-menu. 3 Do one of the following:

Press to return to the previous screen. 228 and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the radio display. Call Log Radio call log. Table 10: Display Icons The following icons appear on the status bar at the top of the radio display. The icons are arranged left most in order of appearance or usage, and are channel-specific. Battery The number of bars (04) shown indi-

cates the charge remaining in the bat-

tery. The icon blinks when the battery is low. Bluetooth Connected7 The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Bluetooth Not Connected7 The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. English Contact Radio contact is available. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. GNSS Available GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is availa-

ble. GNSS Not Available GNSS feature is enabled but is not re-

ceiving data from the satellite. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Message Incoming message. 7 Only applicable for XPR 7580e IS. 229 English Selected channel is being monitored. or Monitor Mute Mode Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is muted. Notification Notification List has one or more missed events. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. (Option board enabled models only) Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-

er Indicates time left before automatic re-

start of radio. Power Level Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Scan8 Scan feature is enabled. Scan-Priority 18 Radio detects activity on channel/

group designated as Priority 1. Scan-Priority 28 Radio detects activity on channel/

group designated as Priority 2. 8 Not applicable in Capacity Plus. 230 The Privacy feature is enabled. Secure Sign In Radio is signed in to the remote serv-

er. Sign Out Radio is signed out of the remote server. Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. Site Roaming9 The site roaming feature is enabled. Talkaround8 In the absence of a repeater, radio is currently configured for direct radio to radio communication. 9 Not applicable in Capacity PlusSingle-Site 10 Only applicable for XPR 7580e IS Tones Disable Tones are turned off. The Privacy feature is disabled. Unsecure Vote Scan Vote scan feature is enabled. Wi-Fi Excellent10 Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good10 Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average10 Wi-Fi signal is average Wi-Fi Poor10 Wi-Fi signal is poor. English 231 English Wi-Fi Unavailable10 Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. NOTICE:

Bluetooth feature is only applicable for XPR 7580e IS Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Bluetooth Sensor Device Bluetooth-enabled sensor device, such as gas sensor. Table 11: Advance Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates that the option is selected. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates that the option is not selec-

ted. Solid Black Box Indicates that the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Table 12: Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. 232 Table 13: Call Icons The following icons appear on the display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate alias or ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. English In the Contacts list, it indicates a phone alias (name) or ID (number). Table 14: Job Tickets Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display in the Job Ticket folder. All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. New Jobs Indicates new jobs. In Progress Jobs are transmitting. This is seen before indication for Job Tickets Send Failed or Sent Succesfully. Send Failed Jobs cannot be sent. Sent Successfully Jobs have been successfully sent. 233 English Indicates Priority Level 1 for jobs. Indicates Priority Level 2 for jobs. Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Indicates Priority Level 3 for jobs. Table 15: Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display after an action to perform a task is taken. Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Successful Transmission (Positive) Successful action taken. Transmission in Progress (Transi-

tional) Transmitting. This is seen before indi-

cation for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. 234 Table 16: Sent Items Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the display in the Sent Items folder. In Progress The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledge-

ment. The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. Send Failed or The text message cannot be sent. or or or Sent Successfully or The text message has been success-

fully sent. 6.6.2 LED Indicators LED indicators show the operational status of your radio. Blinking Red Radio is indicating a battery mismatch. Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. Radio is receiving an emergency transmission. English Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency transmission. Blinking Green Radio is receiving a call or data. Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissions. Radio is detecting activity over the air. NOTICE:

This activity may or may not affect the programmed channel of the radio due to the nature of the digital protocol. There is no LED indication when the radio is detecting activity over the air in Capacity Plus. Radio is transmitting in low battery state. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Transponder System is configured. Solid Yellow Radio is monitoring a conventional channel. Double Blinking Green Mute Mode is enabled. Solid Green Radio is powering up. Radio is transmitting. Blinking Yellow Radio is scanning for activity. Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert. All Capacity PlusMulti-Site channels are busy. 235 Double Blinking Yellow Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. Indicator Tones Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert. Radio is locked. Radio is not connected to the repeater while in Capacity Plus. All Capacity Plus channels are busy. Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone 6.6.3.2 Audio Tones The following are the tones that sound through on the radio speaker. Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Periodic Tone Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. English 6.6.3 Tones 6.6.3.1 236 High Pitched Tone Low Pitched Tone Repetitive Tone A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Momentary Tone Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio. 6.7 Zone and Channel Selections This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or channel on your radio. A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up to 1000 channels and 250 zones, with a maximum of 160 channels per zone. Each channel can be programmed with different features and/or support different groups of users. 6.7.1 Selecting Zones Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio. English 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Zone Selection button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press or to Zone. Press to select. The display shows and the current zone. 2 3 Press select. or to the required zone. Press to The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. 6.7.2 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio by using the alias search. 237 Press to access the menu. 6.7.3 Selecting Channels Press or to Zone. Press to select. The display shows and the current zone. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. Press to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Follow the procedure to select the required channel on your radio after you have selected a zone. Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the channel, subscriber ID, or group ID. 6.8 Calls This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to, make, and stop calls. You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID after you have selected a channel by using one of these features:

Alias Search This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. Contacts List This method provides direct access to the Contacts list. English 1 2 5 238 Manual Dial (by using Contacts) This method is used for Private and Phone Calls only with a keypad microphone. 6.8.1 Group Calls Programmed Number Keys This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. NOTICE:

You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. All the number keys on a keypad microphone can be assigned. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 310 for more information. Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive a call from or make a call to the group of users. 6.8.1.1 Responding to Group Calls To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. Follow the procedure to respond to Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Group Call:

The green LED blinks. Programmed One Touch Access Button The first text line shows the caller alias. This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone Calls only. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button with a short or long programmable button press. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. Programmable Button This method is used for Phone Calls only. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, English 239 indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. Long press caller alias before replying. to return to the Home screen to view the 6.8.1.2 Making Group Calls The green LED lights up. Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio. 2 Do one of the following:

1 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. If the radio receives a Group Call while not on the Home screen, it remains on its current screen prior to answering the call. Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and the group call alias. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. English 240 4 Release the PTT button to listen. 2 The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press English 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6.8.1.3 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 Press to access the menu. to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 5 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the 241 English transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.8.1.4 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 242 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays either the call status for a Private Call or All Call for All Call. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 310 for more information. 6.8.1.5 Making Group Calls by Using the Channel Selector Knob Follow the procedure to make Group Calls by using the Channel Selector Knob. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up.The display shows the Group Call icon and alias. 3 Do one of the following:

English Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. 243 English 6.8.2 Private Calls A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. There are two ways to set up a Private Call. The first type sets up the call after performing a radio presence check, while the second type sets up the call immediately. Only one of these types can be programmed to your radio by your dealer. If your radio is programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call and the target radio is not available:

A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio presence check. See Privacy on page 348 for more information. 6.8.2.1 Responding to Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Private Calls on your radio. 244 When you receive a Private Call:

The green LED blinks. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop an ongoing interruptible call and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 6.8.2.2 Making Private Calls Your radio must be programmed to initiate a Private Call. If this feature is not enabled, a negative indicator tone sounds when you initiate the call. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. button. Press the programmed One Touch Access 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status. 1 English 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 6.8.2.3 Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List Press to access the menu. 245 English 2 Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to the previous screen. 6.8.2.4 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the 246 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line shows the call status. returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 310 for more information. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias. 2 6.8.2.5 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Manual Dial Button Follow the procedure to make Private Calls by using the programmable Manual Dial button. 1 To enter the Manual Dial screen, press the programmed Manual Dial button. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, The display shows Number:. you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The radio 3 Enter a subscriber alias. English 247 English announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The display shows the Private Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line shows the call status. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak When you receive an All Call:

clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 6.8.3.1 Receiving All Calls A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. corner. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.8.3 All Calls 248 An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the channel. An All Call is used to make important The first text line shows the caller alias ID. The second text line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. The radio returns to the screen before receiving the All Call when the call ends. An All Call does not wait for a predetermined period before ending. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call. NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You are not able to continue with any menu navigation or editing until the end of an All Call. 6.8.3.2 Making All Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All Call. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio. 1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and All Call. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. English Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 6.8.3.3 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 249 English 250 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line shows the call status. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 310 for more information. 6.8.4 Selective Calls A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analog system. 6.8.4.1 Responding to Selective Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Selective Calls on your radio. When you receive a Selective Call:

The green LED blinks. The first text line shows the Private Call icon and the caller alias or Selective Call or Alert with Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 6.8.4.2 Making Selective Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call. Follow the procedure to make Selective Calls on your radio. 1 Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status. 3 Do one of the following:

English Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 251 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. 6 The display shows Call Ended. English 6.8.4.3 Making Selective Calls by Using the Channel Selector Knob Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/or respond to a Selective Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call. 1 Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The display shows the Private Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line shows the call status. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 6.8.5 Phone Calls 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. A Phone Call is a call from an individual radio to a telephone. If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio:

Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The display shows Unavailable. Your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 252 During the Phone Call, your radio attempts to end the call when:

Dual Tone Multi Frequency You press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured. You enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits. During channel access, access or deaccess code, or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to the On/Off , Volume Control, and Channel Selector buttons or knobs only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. During channel access, press attempt. A tone sounds. to dismiss the call NOTICE:

The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.8.5.1 The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows your radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to the telephone systems. Disabling all radio tones and alert will automatically turn off the DTMF tone. 6.8.5.1.1 Initiating DTMF Calls Follow the procedure to initiate DTMF calls on your radio. 1 Press and hold the PTT button. 2 Do one of the following:

Enter the desired number to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. English 253 English 6.8.5.2 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The display shows the caller alias or Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 Press to end the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. 254 The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 6.8.5.3 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The display shows the group alias and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 Press to end the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 6.8.5.4 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you can respond to or end the call, only if an All Call type is assigned to the channel. Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as All Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The display shows All Call and Phone Call. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to end the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows All Call and Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. English 255 English 6.8.5.5 Making Phone Calls Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Proceed to Step 3. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 3 Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line shows the call status. If the call is successful:

The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The display continues to show the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The display shows Press OK to Place Phone If the call is unsuccessful:

Call. The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured. A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. 256 If the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. 5 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 7 Press to end the call. 8 Do one of the following:

If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press to proceed. English The radio returns to the previous screen. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the last two steps or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 6.8.5.6 Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 257 English 1 2 258 Press to access the menu. or to Call Phone. Press to Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured. Press select. 4 5 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Enter the access code, and press to proceed. to select. When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. If the selected entry is empty:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Invalid #. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The first text line shows Calling. The second text line shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If the call is successful:

The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second text line shows Phone Call, and the Phone Call icon. If the call is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 6 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The RSSI icon disappears. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 8 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 9 Press to end the call. English 10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-

Access Code:, and press to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 9 and step 10, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 259 English 6.8.5.7 Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Phone Button Follow the procedure to make a phone call with the programmable phone button. 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. icon remains in the top right corner. The second text line displays the call status. If call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press 3 Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. The green LED lights up. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If the call-setup is successful, the Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call 4 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call:

Do one of the following:

Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone sounds. If the entry 260 for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 5 Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De- Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press the proceed. button to The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended . If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 and step 5 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. English When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. NOTICE:

During channel access, press the call attempt and a tone sounds. to dismiss During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. 6.8.5.8 Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the manual dial. 261 Press select. Press select. English 1 2 3 4 5 6 262 Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Phone Number. Press to The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor. Enter the telephone number, and press proceed. to The display shows Access Code: and a blinking cursor if the access code was not preconfigured. Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 7 The green LED lights up. The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line shows the call status. If the call is successful:

The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The display continues to show the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. If the call is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 8 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 9 Release the PTT button to listen. 10 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 11 Press to end the call. 12 Do one of the following:

English If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 11, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 6.8.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the following actions:

Press the Voice PTT button. Press the Emergency button. Perform data transmission. 263 Press the programmed TX Interrupt Remote Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. English Dekey button. The recipient radio displays Call Interrupted. 6.8.7 Broadcast Voice Calls A Broadcast Voice Call is a one-way voice call from any user to an entire talkgroup. The Broadcast Voice Call feature allows only the call initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the recipients of the call cannot respond (no Call Hang Time). Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.8.7.1 Making Broadcast Voice Calls Program your radio to make Broadcast Voice Calls. 1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. 2 Do one of the following:

264 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows Broadcast Call, the Group Call icon and alias.The display shows the Group Call icon and alias. 4 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. NOTICE:

Users on the channel cannot respond to Broadcast Voice Calls. The radio returns to the previous menu after the call ends. English 6.8.7.2 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Voice Call on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 On the Home screen, long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID. If the number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative indicator tone sounds 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio returns to the previous menu after the call ends. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 310 for more information. 6.8.7.3 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Alias Search You can use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. You can retrieve subscriber aliases this way only from Contacts. If you release the PTT button while this call is being set up, the call exits without any indication and returns to the previous screen. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see Party Not Available on the display; the radio returns to the menu before initiating the radio presence check. The green LED lights up. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line shows the call status. NOTICE:

3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Users on the channel cannot respond to a Broadcast Voice Call. button or Press to exit alias search. If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to the previous screen. 265 English 1 2 266 Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. User on the channel cannot respond to a Broadcast Voice Call. The radio returns to the previous menu after the call ends. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 6.8.7.4 Receiving Broadcast Voice Calls 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. When you receive a Broadcast Voice Call:

The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias ID. The second text line displays Broadcast Call. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination ID, call type, and Call icon. through the speaker. When the call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen. A Broadcast Voice Call does not wait for a predetermined period before ending. 2 Do one of the following:

You cannot respond to a Broadcast Voice Call. NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the Broadcast Voice Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You cannot continue with any menu navigation or editing until the end of the Broadcast Voice Call. 6.8.8 Unaddressed Calls An Unaddressed Call is a group call to one of the 16 predefined group IDs. This feature is configured using CPS-RM. A contact for one of the predefined IDs is required to initiate and/or receive an Unaddressed Call. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.8.8.1 Making Unaddressed Calls 1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. English Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up.The text line shows Unaddress Call, the Group Call icon and alias. 4 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. A momentary tone sounds. The display shows Unaddress Call, the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the 267 English transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating that the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The call initiator can press to end a Group Call. The green LED lights up. The text line shows Unaddress Call, the caller alias, 3 Release the PTT button to listen. 6.8.8.2 Responding to Unaddressed Calls When you receive an Unaddressed Call:

The green LED blinks. A momentary tone sounds. and the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, 268 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.8.9 Open Voice Channel Mode (OVCM) An Open Voice Channel Mode (OVCM) allows a radio that is not preconfigured to work in a particular system to both receive and transmit during a group or individual call. The OVCM group call also supports broadcast calls. Program your radio to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.8.9.1 Making OVCM Calls 4 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Your radio must be programmed for you to make an OVCM Call. Follow the procedure to make OVCM Calls on your radio. 6.8.9.2 Responding to OVCM Calls 1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. When you receive an OVCM Call:

The green LED blinks. 2 Do one of the following:

The text line shows the call type icon, OVCM, and alias. Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds Press the programmed One Touch Access through the speaker. button. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The text line shows the call type icon, OVCM and alias. indicating that the radio has entered OVCM State. NOTICE:

Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback during a Broadcast Call. The display shows Talkback Prohibit. If the PTT button is pressed during a Broadcast Call, the Talkback Prohibit Tone sounds momentarily. 1 Do one of the following:

English 269 English If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.9 270 Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.9.1 Bluetooth This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-

enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32 ft) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate the radio and the accessory. 1 2 3 At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-

establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10 m range. Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, a sensor device, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-

enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device. Your radio connects to the Bluetooth-enabled device within range with either the strongest signal strength, or to one which it has connected to before in a prior session. Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press the home back button operation as this cancels the operation. during the finding and connecting 6.9.1.1 English Turning Bluetooth On and Off Follow the procedure to turn Bluetooth on and off. Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to My Status. Press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

Press or display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. The Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 271 6.9.1.2 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices 5 Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Press or to Connect. Press to select. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device. The display shows Connecting to <Device>. Press or to Devices. Press to select. The display shows beside the connected device. Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. 4 Do one of the following:

Press or to the required device. Press to select. Press or to Find Devices to locate available devices. Press or to the required device. Press to select. Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. English 1 2 3 272 6.9.1.3 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices in discoverable mode. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. or to Find Me. Press Press The radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. to select. Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. The display shows beside the connected device. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 6.9.1.4 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select. English 273 English 4 5 Press to select. Press select. or to the required device. Press or to Disconnect. Press to Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device. The display shows Disconnecting from

<Device>. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. Wait for acknowledgment. A tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears. The disappears beside the connected device. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 6.9.1.5 274 The display shows one of the following results:

A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Radio. Bluetooth. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 6.9.1.6 Viewing Device Details Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 1 Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select. or to the required device. Press or to the required device. Press Press to select. or to View Details. Press to Press or to Edit Name. Press to select. 2 3 4 5 6 This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 6.9.1.7 Editing Device Name Follow the procedure to edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled devices. Enter a new device name. Press to select. The display shows Device Name Saved. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. 6.9.1.8 Deleting Device Name Press to access the menu. You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. English 275 English 1 2 3 4 5 276 Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Bluetooth. Press to select. Press or to Devices. Press to select. or to BT Mic Gain. Press to 1 2 3 Press select. Press to select. or to the required device. Press 4 Press or to the BT Mic Gain type and the Press The display shows Device Deleted. to Delete. Press or to select. current values. Press the values here. to select. You can edit 5 Press or to increase or to decrease values. This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. Press to select. 6.9.1.9 Bluetooth Mic Gain This feature allows the user to control the microphone gain value of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device. 6.9.1.10 Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode must be enabled by the dealer or system administrator. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. If enabled, Bluetooth is not displayed in the Menu and you cannot use any Bluetooth programmable button features. Turning Indoor Location On or Off You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions. Access this feature through the menu. Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your radio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode enables dedicated devices to use your radio position in the process of Bluetooth-based location. 6.9.2 Indoor Location NOTICE:

Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Indoor Location is use to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position. 6.9.2.1 a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. or to Bluetooth and press to c. Press or to Indoor Location and press to select. d. Press to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. English 277 English 278 If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. e. Press to turn off Indoor Location. to turn off Indoor Location. b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. Access this feature by using the programmed button. a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. 6.9.2.2 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information. Press to access the menu. 1 2 4 Press select. Press select. to select. or to Beacons and press to The display shows the beacons information. 6.9.3 or to Bluetooth and press to My Tasks folder 3 Press or to Indoor Location and press Shared Tasks folder English Job Tickets This feature allows your radio to receive messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks to perform. NOTICE:

This feature can be customized through the Customer Programming Software (CPS) according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two folders that contain different Job Tickets:

Personalized Job Tickets assigned to your signed in user ID. Shared Job Tickets assigned to a group of individuals. You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All, New, Started, and Completed. Job Tickets are retained even after the radio is turned off and turned on again. All Job Tickets are located in the All folder. Depending on how your radio is programmed, Job Tickets are sort by their priority level followed by time received. New Job Tickets, 279 English Job Tickets with recent changes in state, and Job Tickets with the highest priority are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 or 500 Job Tickets, depending on your radio model. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio automatically detects and discards duplicated Job Tickets with the same Job Ticket ID. Depending on the importance of the Job Tickets, the dispatcher adds a Priority Level to them. There are three priority levels: Priority 1, Priority 2, and Priority 3. Priority 1 has the highest priority and Priority 3 has the lowest priority. There are also Job Tickets with no priority. Your radio updates accordingly when dispatcher makes the following changes:

Modify content of Job Tickets. Add or edit Priority Level of Job Tickets. Move Job Tickets from folder to folder. Canceling of Job Tickets. Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Follow the procedure to access the Job Ticket folder. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to or to the required folder. Press to 4 Press or to the required Job Ticket. Press to select. 6.9.3.1 280 6.9.3.2 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server 6.9.3.3 Creating Job Tickets This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Log In. Press to select. If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which are based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. CPS programming software is required to configure the Job Ticket template. Press to access the menu. or to Job Tickets. Press to 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Create Ticket. Press to 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. English 281 6.9.3.4 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Ticket. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

1 Use the keypad to type the required room number. A negative indicator tone sounds. Press to select. The display shows a negative mini notice. or to Room Status. Press to or to the required option. Press 6.9.3.5 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Tickets. Press or to Send. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 1 Press to select. or to the required option. Press English Press select. Press to select. 2 3 4 282 The display shows a positive mini notice. to select. Press or to Send. Press to select. or to Job Tickets. Press to 2 1 The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.3.6 Responding to Job Tickets Follow the procedure to respond to job tickets on your radio. Press to access the menu. English Press select. Press select. 2 3 5 or to the required folder. Press to 4 Press or to the required job ticket. Press Press once more to access the sub-menu. You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to Quick Reply. 6 Press or to the required job ticket. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 283 English 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. or to Job Tickets. Press to or to the required folder. Press to Press or to All folder. Press to select. 5 Press or to the required Job Ticket. Press 6.9.3.7 Deleting Job Tickets Follow the procedure to delete job tickets on your radio. to select. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 4 Press to access the menu. Press again while viewing the Job Ticket. Press or to Delete. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 284 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 6 7 6.9.3.8 Deleting All Job Tickets Follow the procedure to delete all job tickets on your radio. 6 Do one of the following:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to English or to the required folder. Press to Press or to All folder. Press to select. or to Delete All. Press to 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 285 English 6.9.4 6.9.4.1 286 Multi-Site Control 1 Do one of the following:

Starting Automatic Site Search Your radio is able to search for sites and switch between sites when signal is weak or your radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. When the signal is strong, the radio remains on the current site. This setting is applicable when your current radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Capacity PlusMulti-Site configuration. Your radio can perform either one of the following site searches:

Automatic Site Search Manual Site Search If the current channel is a multi-site channel with an attached roam list and is out of range, and the site is unlocked, your radio also performs automatic site search. Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities.Press to select. or to Radio Settings.Press to or to Site Roaming. Press to or to Unlock Site. Press to A tone sounds. The display shows Site Unlocked. 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio is actively searching for a new site. The yellow LED turns off once the radio locks on to a site. Press select. 4 5 6.9.4.2 Stopping Automatic Site Search Follow the procedure to stop automatic site search when your radio is actively searching for a new site. 1 Do one of the following:

English or to Site Roaming. Press to Press or to Lock Site. Press to select. A tone sounds. The disappears from beside Enabled. The LED turns off. The display shows the current channel alias. Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button. Skip the following steps. 6.9.4.3 Enabling Manual Site Search Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. Skip the following steps. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. 287 English 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. 288 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. The LED extinguishes. A negative tone sounds. or to Radio Settings. Press to The display shows Out of Range. If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to connect to it, your radio shows the following indications:

A negative tone sounds. or to Site Roaming. Press to The LED turns off. or to Active Search. Press to The display shows Channel Busy. 6.9.5 Text Entry Configuration A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Finding Site. Your radio allows you to configure different text. You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:

If the radio finds a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

A positive tone sounds. The LED extinguishes. Word Predict Word Correct Sentence Cap My Words The display shows Site <Alias> Found. If the radio fails to find a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

Numbers Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

Symbols Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) NOTICE:

Press at any time to return to the previous screen or long press Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. to return to the Home 6.9.5.1 Enabling or Disabling Word Predict Word Predict: Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. English 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Text Entry. Press to or to Word Predict. Press to 6 Do one of the following:

Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to Press enabled, to enable the Word Predict. If appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Microphone Dynamic disappears Distortion Control. If disabled, beside Enabled. 289 English 6.9.5.2 Sentence Cap This feature is used to automatically enable capitalization of the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. Press to enable Sentence Cap. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Sentence Cap. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 6.9.5.3 Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into the in-built dictionary of your radio. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. or to Text Entry. Press to Press to access the menu. or to Sentence Cap. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 1 2 3 6 Do one of the following:

290 or to Text Entry. Press to or to Radio Settings. Press to Press select. Press select. 4 5 6 1 2 Press or to My Words. Press to select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to List of Words. Press to The display shows the list of custom words. 6.9.5.4 Editing Custom Words You can edit custom words saved in your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to My Words. Press to select. or to List of Words. Press to Display shows the list of custom words. or to the required word. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to Edit. Press to select. 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Press select. Press select. Press select. Press select. 3 4 5 6 7 8 English 291 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Long press to change text entry method. or to Radio Settings. Press to 10 Press once your custom word is completed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. 6.9.5.5 Adding Custom Words or to Text Entry. Press to Press or to My Words. Press to select. or to Add New Word. Press to Display shows the list of custom words. You can add custom words into the in-built radio dictionary. 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Press to move one space to the left. 292 Press key to move one space to the right. Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 8 1 Press once your custom word is completed. or to Text Entry. Press to The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display show positive mini notice. Press or to My Words. Press to select. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. Press select. or to the required word. Press to 6.9.5.6 Deleting a Custom Word Press or to Delete. Press to select. You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. 8 Choose one of the following. Press to access the menu. At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 6 7 English 293 English 1 2 3 4 5 294 Press select. Press select. Press or to No. Press to return to the previous screen. 6 Press select. or to Delete All. Press to 6.9.5.7 Deleting All Custom Words You can delete all custom words from the in-built dictionary of your radio. 7 Do one of the following:

At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No to return to the previous Press to access the menu. screen. Press to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 6.9.6 Talkaround or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Text Entry. Press to Press or to My Words. Press to select. This feature allows you to continue communicating when your repeater is non-operational, or when your radio is out of range from the repeater but within the talk range of other radios. The talkaround setting is retained even after powering down. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus Single-Site, Capacity PlusMulti-Site, and Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 4 Press select. 6.9.6.1 Toggling Between Repeater and Talkaround Modes Follow the procedure to toggle between Repeater and Talkaround modes on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

6.9.7 Monitor Feature English or to Talkaround. Press to If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. The screen automatically returns to the previous screen. Press the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button. Skip the following steps. The feature allows you to ensure that a channel is free before transmitting. Press to access the menu. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus Single-Site and Capacity PlusMulti-Site. 2 3 Press select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 6.9.7.1 Monitoring Channels or to Radio Settings. Press to Follow the procedure to monitor channels. 295 1 Long press the programmed Monitor button. Turning Permanent Monitor On or Off English The Monitor icon appears on the display and the LED lights up solid yellow. If the channel is in use:

The display shows the Monitor icon. You hear radio activity or total silence. The yellow LED lights up. If the monitored channel is free, you hear a white noise". 2 Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6.9.7.2 Permanent Monitor The Permanent Monitor feature is used to continuously monitor a selected channel for activity. 6.9.7.2.1 296 Follow the procedure to turn Permanent Monitor on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button. The display shows Permanent Monitor On and When the radio enters the mode:

An alert tone sounds. The yellow LED lights up. the Monitor icon. When the radio exits the mode:

An alert tone sounds. The yellow LED turns off. The display shows Permanent Monitor Off. 6.9.8 Radio Check This feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the radio user. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. English This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. If unsuccessful:

The display shows a positive mini notice. 6.9.8.1 Sending Radio Checks Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.The green LED lights up. Wait for acknowledgment. If you press acknowledgment, a tone sounds, the radio terminates all retries, and exits Radio Check mode. when the radio is waiting for If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. 6.9.8.2 Sending Radio Checks by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your radio by using the Contacts list. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 297 English 4 Press select. or to Radio Check. Press to 6.9.9 Remote Monitor This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a target radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. This feature stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. 6.9.9.1 Initiating Remote Monitor Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If you press acknowledgement, a tone sounds, the radio terminates all retries, and exits Radio Check mode. when the radio is waiting for If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. 298 The display shows a negative mini notice. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. 3 Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the Contacts list. 4 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

Press to access the menu. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.9.2 1 2 5 Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4 Press or to Remote Mon.. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. English 299 English 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.9.3 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the manual dial. Press to access the menu. 1 300 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press to 5 Do one of the following:

Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press to proceed. proceed. Edit the previously dialed ID, and press to 6 Press or to Remote Mon.. 7 Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.10 English Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels or groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel or group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel or group. Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries. You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a scan list. You can attach a new scan list to your radio by using Front Panel Programming. See Front Panel Programming on page 189 for more information. The Priority icon appears on the left of the member alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a scan list. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. 301 English 6.9.10.1 Viewing Entries in the Scan List Follow the procedure to view the entries in the Scan list on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan List. Press to select. Press or to Scan. Press to select. 4 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. Press or to Scan List. Press to select. 5 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. 4 Press or to view each member on the list. 6.9.10.2 Viewing Entries in the Scan List by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to view entries in the Scan list on your radio by using the alias search. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 1 2 3 302 1 2 3 4 6.9.10.3 Adding New Entries to the Scan List Follow the procedure to add new entries to the Scan list on your radio. 6 Press or to the required priority level. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice and then, Add Another?. Press to access the menu. 7 Do one of the following:

Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press or to Scan List. Press to select. Press select. or to Add Member. Press to 5 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press or to Yes to add another entry. Press to select. Repeat step 5 and step 6. Press or to No to save the current list. Press to select. 6.9.10.4 Deleting Entries from the Scan List Follow the procedure to delete entries from the Scan list. 1 Press to access the menu. English 303 English 2 3 5 Press or to Scan. Press to select. Long press deleting all required aliases or IDs. to return to the Home screen after Press or to Scan List. Press to select. 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 6.9.10.5 Setting Priority for Entries in the Scan List Follow the procedure to set priorities for entries in the Scan list on your radio. Press or to Delete. Press to select. The display shows Delete Entry?. Press to access the menu. 6 Do one of the following:

Press or to Yes to delete the entry. Press Press or to Scan. Press to select. to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to Scan List. Press to select. Press or to No to return to the previous 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press 8 1 2 3 screen. Press to select. to select. 7 Repeat step 4 to step 6 to delete other entries. 304 5 Press select. or to Edit Priority. Press to 6 Press or to the required priority level. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The Priority icon appears on the left of the member alias. There are two ways of initiating scan:

Main Channel Scan (Manual) Your radio scans all the channels or groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your radio may, depending on the settings, automatically start on the last scanned active channel or group, or on the channel where scan was initiated. Auto Scan (Automatic) Your radio automatically starts scanning when you select a channel or group that has Auto Scan enabled. 6.9.11 Scan Your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice activity when you start a scan. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. During a dual-mode scan, if you are on a digital channel, and your radio locks onto an analog channel, it automatically switches from digital mode to analog mode for the duration of the call. This is also true for the reverse. NOTICE:

When you configure Receive Group Message In Scan, your radio is able to receive group messages from non-home channels. Your radio is able to reply the group messages on home channel but is not able to reply on non-home channels. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.9.11.1 Turning Scan On or Off Follow the procedure to turn scan on or off on your radio. English 305 English NOTICE:

While scanning, the radio only accepts data (for example: text message, location, or PC data) if received on its Selected Channel. 1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select a channel programmed with a scan list. If scan is disabled:

The display shows Scan Off. The Scan icon disappears. The LED turns off. Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press select. or to Scan State. Press to 5 Press or to the required scan state and press to select. If scan is enabled:

The display shows Scan On and Scan icon. The yellow LED blinks. 2 3 4 306 6.9.11.2 Responding to Transmissions During Scanning During scanning, your radio stops on a channel or group where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a programmed duration known as hang time. Follow the procedure to respond to transmissions during scanning. 1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button during hang time. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 2 Release the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. The nuisance channel is deleted. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The radio returns to scanning other channels or groups if you do not respond within the hang time. 6.9.11.4 Restoring Nuisance Channels Follow the procedure to restore nuisance channels on your radio. 6.9.11.3 Deleting Nuisance Channels If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise,

(termed a "nuisance" channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected Channel. Follow the procedure to delete nuisance channels on your radio. 1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or nuisance channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a tone. Do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and then power it on again. Stop and restart a scan using the programmed Scan button or menu. Change the channel using the Channel Selector Knob. English 307 English 6.9.12 Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas where there are multiple base stations transmitting identical information on different analog channels. Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations and performs a voting process to select the strongest received signal. Once that is established, your radio receives transmissions from that base station. During a vote scan, the yellow LED blinks and the display shows the Vote Scan icon. To respond to a transmission during a vote scan, see Responding to Transmissions During Scanning on page 306. Each entry, depending on context, associates with the different call types: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Call, or Dispatch Call. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for further details. Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. NOTICE:

You see a checkmark before each number key that is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Empty, you have not assign a number key to the entry. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

6.9.13 Contacts Settings Contacts provides address book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted. Call Type Call Alias Call ID 308 NOTICE:

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Calls, Private Calls, and All Calls on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to decrypt the transmission. 6.9.13.1 Adding New Contacts Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. Press select. or to New Contact. Press to 4 Press or to select contact type Radio Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select. to proceed. to proceed. to select. 5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press English 6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press 7 Press or to the required ringer type. Press A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. 6.9.13.2 Setting Default Contact Follow the procedure to set the default contact on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. 309 or to Set as Default. Press to 5 Do one of the following:

English 2 4 1 2 310 Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press select. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows the selected default alias or ID. beside 6.9.13.3 Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4 Press select. or to Program Key. Press to If the desired number key has not been assigned to an entry, press to the desired or number key. Press to select. If the desired number key has been assigned to an entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first text line shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:

Press or to Yes. Press to select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved and a positive mini notice. or to No to return to the previous Press step. 6.9.13.4 Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys 5 6 Press or to Empty. Press to select. The first text line shows Clear from all keys. 1 Do one of the following:

Press or to Yes. Press to select. Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4. Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 2 4 NOTICE:

When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Contact Saved. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Press select. or to Program Key. Press to This feature allows you to configure call or text message ringing tones. 6.9.14 Call Indicator Settings English 311 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press select. 312 6.9.14.1 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts 7 Do one of the following:

Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows and the selected tone. Press or to Off. Press to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show beside Off. or to Tones/Alert. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press to or to Call Alert. Press to 6.9.14.2 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Private Calls on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Tones/Alerts. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press to 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Private Call. Press to The display shows tones are enabled. beside On if Private Call ringing The display shows ringing tones are disabled. beside Off if Private Call 7 Do one of the following:

1 2 3 English The display shows and the selected tone. Press or to Off. Press to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show beside Off. 6.9.14.3 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Selective Calls on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to the required tone. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 313 English 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press to 6.9.14.4 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for text messages on your radio. or to Selective Call. Press to Press to access the menu. The display shows and the current tone. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 7 Do one of the following:

or to Radio Settings. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press to Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows and the selected tone. Press or to Off. Press to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show beside Off. 314 or to Text Message. Press to The display shows and the current tone. Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio. Press select. 6 7 Press or to Messages. Press to select. Press to access the menu. The display shows at the current tone. 8 Do one of the following:

Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to the required tone. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to to select. The display shows and the selected tone. Press or to Off. Press to select. If the ringing tones were earlier enabled, the display shows beside Off. If the ringing tones were earlier disabled, the display does not show beside Off. 6.9.14.5 or to Tones/Alert. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. English 315 English 6 7 1 2 316 Press or to Telemetry. Press to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Press select. A or to the required tone. Press appears beside the selected tone. to 6.9.14.6 Assigning Ring Styles The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact.The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. 4 5 6 Press or to View/Edit. Press to select. Press until display shows Ringer menu A indicates the current selected tone. Press select. or to the required tone. Press to The display shows a positive mini notice. Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 6.9.14.7 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Follow the procedure to escalate alarm tone volume on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. The call log feature is used to view and manage recent calls. Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs, depending on the system configuration on your radio. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

English or to Tones/Alert. Press to 5 Press or to Escalert. Store Alias or ID to Contacts Delete Call View Details 6.9.15.1 Viewing Recent Calls Press enabled, disappears beside Enabled. to enable OR disable Escalert. If appears beside Enabled. If disabled, 1 2 Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 4 6 Press select. Press select. 6.9.15 Press or to Call Log. Press to select. 3 Press or to the preferred list. The options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists. 317 Press to select. The display shows the most recent entry. to select. 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press 4 Press or to view the list. You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is currently showing by pressing the PTT button. 5 Press select. or to View Details. Press to The display shows the call details. 6.9.15.2 Viewing Call List Details Follow the procedure to view call details on your radio. 6.9.15.3 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List Press to access the menu. Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio from the Call list. Press or to Call Log. Press to select. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to the required list. Press to Press or to Call Log. Press to select. 1 2 English 1 2 3 318 English Press select. 3 5 to select. or to the required list. Press to Press to access the menu. 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Press or to Call Log. Press to select. Press or to Store. Press to select. The display shows a blinking cursor. or to the required list. Press to Press select. If the list is empty:

A tone sounds. 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The display shows List Empty. Press to select. You can store an ID without an alias. The display shows a positive mini notice. 4 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 6.9.15.4 Deleting Calls from the Call List Follow the procedure to delete calls on your radio from the Call list. Press or to Delete. Press to select. 6 Do one of the following:

Press to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows a positive mini notice. 319 1 2 3 5 Press or to No. Press to select. with the alias or ID of the calling radio. The radio returns to the previous screen. The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert 6.9.16 Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu using Contacts, manual dial, or a programmed One Touch Access button. 6.9.16.1 Responding to Call Alerts When you receive a Call Alert:

A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:

Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller. Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log. See Notification List on page 187 and Call Log Features on page 136 for more information. 6.9.16.2 Making Call Alerts Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio. English 320 English 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Press or to the required alias or ID. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. Press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.16.3 Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List Press to access the menu. 1 2 or to Manual Dial . Press or to Radio Number . Press Press to select. Press to select. The display shows Radio Number: and a blinking cursor. Enter the subscriber ID you want to page. Press to select. 4 Press select. or to Call Alert. Press to The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Do one of the following:

Select the subscriber alias or ID directly 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If the acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. 321 English If the acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.17 Dynamic Caller Alias This feature allows you to dynamically edit a Caller Alias from your radio front panel. When in a call, the receiving radio displays the Caller Alias of the transmitting radio. The Caller Aliases list can store up to 500 Caller Aliases of transmitting radio. You can view or make Private Calls from the Caller Aliases list. When you turn off your radio, the history of receiving Caller Aliases is removed from the Caller Aliases list. 6.9.17.1 Editing Your Caller Alias After Turning On the Radio 1 Turn on your radio. 322 2 1 2 3 4 Enter your new Caller Alias. Press to proceed. The display shows a positive mini notice. NOTICE:

When in a call, the receiving radio displays your new Caller Alias. 6.9.17.2 Editing Your Caller Alias from the Main Menu Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Info.. Press to Press or to My ID. Press to select. Press to proceed. or to Caller Aliases. Press to 5 6 7 1 Press or to Edit. Press to select. Enter your new Caller Alias. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. NOTICE:

When in a call, the receiving radio displays your new Caller Alias. 6.9.17.3 Viewing the Caller Aliases List You can access the Caller Aliases list to view the transmitting Caller Alias details. Press to access the menu. English Press select. Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 1 2 or to the preferred list. Press to or to View Details. Press to 6.9.17.4 Initiating Private Call From the Caller Aliases List You can access the Caller Aliases list to initiate Private Call. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Caller Aliases. Press to 323 or to the <required Caller Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. 4 To call, press and hold the PTT button. English 3 Press Alias>. 6.9.18 Mute Mode Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio indicators on your radio. When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, your radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. IMPORTANT:

You can only enable either Face Down or Man Down one at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. Do one of the following:

Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. Access this feature by placing the radio in a face-

down position momentarily. Depending on radio model, the Face Down feature can be enabled either through the radio menu or by your system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. IMPORTANT:

User can only enable either Man Down or Face Down at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e, XPR 7350e/XPR 7380e only. Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode On. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:

The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited. 6.9.18.1 324 Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen. Radio is muted. that is configured. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration 6.9.18.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range between 0.56 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the radio is moved to a face-up position or the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. English or to Radio Settings. Press to 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Mute Timer. Press to 5 Press or to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press

. 6.9.18.3 Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:

Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. Place the radio in a face-up position momentarily. The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:

325 English Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode Off. The blinking red LED turns off. Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. NOTICE:

Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. 6.9.19 Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even when there is activity on the current channel. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short Press Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. 326 Long Press Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. NOTICE:

If a short press to the Emergency button initiates Emergency mode, then a long press to the same enables the radio to exit Emergency mode. If a long press to the Emergency button initiates Emergency mode, then a short press to the same enables the radio to exit Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow NOTICE:

Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button. In addition, each alarm has the following types:

Regular Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over and/or you press the PTT button. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker. If hot mic is enabled, the incoming calls sound through the speaker after the programmed hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators only appear once you press the PTT button. 6.9.19.1 Receiving Emergency Alarms When you receive an Emergency Alarm:

A tone sounds. The red LED blinks. English The display shows the Emergency icon, and the Emergency caller alias or if there is more than one alarm, all emergency caller aliases are displayed in an Alarm List. 1 Do one of the following:

If only one alarm, press details. to view more If more than one alarm, press or to the required alias, and press details. to view more Press to view the action options. Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm list. 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. 5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list. 327 6 To return to home screen, perform the following actions:

transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. a Press

. b Press or to Yes. c Press to select. The radio returns to the home screen and the display shows the Emergency icon. 6.9.19.2 Responding to Emergency Alarms 1 Make sure the display shows the Alarm List. Press or to the required alias or ID. NOTICE:

Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency initiating radio. All other radios, including the emergency receiving radio, transmit non-emergency voice. The green LED lights up. Your radio remains in the Emergency mode. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. 2 Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency When the emergency initiating radio responds:

voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm targeted. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon and ID, transmitting radio ID, and the Alarm list. English 328 6.9.19.3 Sending Emergency Alarms This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. You see one of these results:

The display shows Tx Alarms and the destination alias. The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. English NOTICE:

If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed through CPS. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The Emergency tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:

A tone sounds. The display shows Alarm Failed. The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. 329 English 6.9.19.4 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Call to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received calls to sound through the radios speaker, until you press the PTT button to initiate the call. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, but allow incoming calls to sound through the radios speaker. The indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate, or respond to, the call. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with call on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. You see the following:

The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. 330 The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. NOTICE:

If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed by your dealer or system administrator. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The Emergency tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. Your radio enters the Emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon. 6.9.19.5 Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow 4 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. The display shows the caller and group aliases. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 7 To exit the Emergency mode once the call ends, press the Emergency Off button. The radio returns to the Home screen. This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the speaker. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode. If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. English 331 English NOTICE:

Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.9.19.6 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. You see one of these results:

The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. The radio automatically stops transmitting when:

The cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. 332 The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is disabled. 3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. 6.9.19.7 Reinitiating Emergency Mode Perform one of the following actions:

Change the channel while the radio is in Emergency mode. NOTICE:

You can reinitiate emergency mode only if you enable emergency alarm on the new channel. Press the programmed Emergency On button during an emergency initiation or transmission state. Turning the Man Down Feature On or Off English The radio exits the Emergency mode, and reinitiates Emergency. 6.9.20 Man Down This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is a change in the motion of the radio, such as the tilt of the radio, motion and/or the lack of motion for a predefined time. Following a change in the motion of the radio for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns the user with an audio indicator indicating that a change in motion is detected. If there is still no acknowledgment by the user before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm or an Emergency Call. You can program the reminder timer by using CPS. 6.9.20.1 NOTICE:

The programmed Man Down button and Man Down settings are configured using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. If you disable the Man Down feature, the programmed alert tone sounds repeatedly until the Man Down feature is enabled. A device failure tone sounds when the Man Down feature fails while powering up. The device failure tone continues until the radio resumes normal operation. You can enable or disable this feature by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Man Down button to toggle the feature on or off. Access this feature using the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 333 English to select. d. Press select. c. Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Man Down. Press to You can also use option. or to change the selected characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. NOTICE:

The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Contact your dealer for more information. e. Press to enable or disable Man Down. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.9.21.1 Text Messages The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted according to the most recently received. 6.9.21 Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio

(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 1 2 6.9.21.1.1 Viewing Text Messages Press to access the menu. Press or to Messages. Press to select. 334 3 5 Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. If the Inbox is empty:

The display shows List Empty. 4 Press or to the required message. Press A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. to select. 4 Press or to the required message. Press to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. 6.9.21.1.2 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text message from the inbox. Press to access the menu. You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. Long press to return to the Home screen. 6.9.21.1.3 Viewing Saved Text Messages 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. 3 1 2 Press or to Messages. Press to select. Press to access the menu. English 335 Press or to Messages. Press to select. NOTICE:

The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the message if the PTT button is pressed. Press or to Drafts. Press to select. 4 Press or to the required message. Press 1 Do one of the following:

to select. 6.9.21.1.4 Responding to Text Messages Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on your radio. When you receive a text message:

The display shows the Notification list with the alias or ID of the sender. The display shows the Message icon. Press or to Read. Press to select. The display shows the text message. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-

mail application. or to Read Later. Press Press select. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to receiving the text message. to Press or to Delete. Press to select. 2 Press to return to the Inbox. English 2 3 336 6.9.21.1.5 Replying to Text Messages Press to access the sub-menu. Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on your radio. 6 Do one of the following:

1 Do one of the following:

Press or to Reply. Press to select. English Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to Step step 3. Press to access the menu. Press or to Messages. Press to select. 2 3 Press or to Inbox. Press to select. 4 Press or to the required message. Press to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. 5 7 Press select. or to Quick Reply. Press to A blinking cursor appears. You can write or edit your message, if required. Press once message is composed. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming the message is being sent. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

The display shows a positive mini notice. 337 English A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.21.1.6 Forwarding Text Messages Follow the procedure to forward text messages on your radio. When you are at the Resend option screen:

1 or Press the same message to another subscriber or group alias or ID. to Forward, and press to send 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 1 2 6.9.21.1.7 Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to forward text messages by using the manual dial on your radio. Press or to Forward. Press to select. Press subscriber or group alias or ID. to send the same message to another 338 English Press select. 3 4 or to Manual Dial. Press to Editing Text Messages Select Edit to edit the message. The display shows Radio Number:. NOTICE:

If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. Press or to Edit. Press to select. The display shows a blinking cursor. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to move one space to the right. Press to move one space to the left. Press to delete any unwanted characters. The display shows a negative mini notice. Long press to change text entry method. 1 3 If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. 6.9.21.1.8 Press once message is composed. 4 Do one of the following:

339 English Press or the message. to Send and press to send Press or to Save and press to save the message to the Drafts folder. Press to edit the message. Press to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. 6.9.21.1.9 Sending Text Messages It is assumed that you have a newly written text message or a saved text message. Select the message recipient. Do one of the following:

Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 340 Press or to Manual Dial. Press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID. Press

. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A low tone sounds. The display shows positive mini notice. The display shows negative mini notice. The message is moved to the Sent Items folder. The message is marked with a Send Failed icon. NOTICE:

For a newly written text message, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. 6.9.21.1.10 Editing Saved Text Messages Press or to Send. Press to send the message. Press while viewing the message. Press

. Press or to choose between English 1 2 4 Press or to Edit. Press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press or to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. Press once message is composed. Do one of the following:

saving or deleting the message. Press select. to 6.9.21.1.11 Resending Text Messages When you are at the Resend option screen:

Press same subscriber or group alias or ID. to resend the same message to the If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 341 The radio returns to the Resend option screen. 4 Press or to the required message. Press 6.9.21.1.12 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete text messages from the Inbox on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press or to Messages. Press to select. to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to access the sub-menu. Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. The screen returns to the Inbox. Press the programmed Text Message button. Press or to Delete. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. If the Inbox is empty:

The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. 6.9.21.1.13 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete all text messages from the Inbox on your radio. 5 6 7 English 2 3 342 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. 6.9.21.1.14 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder Press to access the menu. 1 Do one of the following:

Press or to Messages. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. If the Inbox is empty:

The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. 2 3 4 5 Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press or to Messages. Press to select. Press or to Drafts. Press to select. 4 Press or to the required message. Press 2 3 5 Press select. or to Delete All. Press to to select. Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press again while viewing the message. English 343 Press or text message. to Delete. Press to delete the 6.9.21.2 Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items folder. You can resend, forward, edit, or delete a Sent text message. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. If you long press Home screen. at any time, the radio returns to the NOTICE:

If the channel type, for example a conventional digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. 6.9.21.2.1 Viewing Sent Text Messages Follow the procedure to view sent text messages on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. English 6 344 2 3 Press select. on. Press or to Messages. Press to select. or to Sent Items. Press to If the Sent Items folder is empty:

The display shows List Empty. A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned When you are viewing a Sent message:

Press while viewing the message. 1 2 Press or to Resend. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. 4 Press or to the required message. Press If successful:

to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. If unsuccessful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. 6.9.21.2.2 Sending Sent Text Messages Follow the procedure to send a sent text message on your radio. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 167 for more information. English 345 English 2 3 Press select. 346 6.9.21.2.3 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder 4 Press select. or to Delete All. Press to Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. 5 Do one of the following:

1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. Press or to Messages. Press to select. 6.9.21.3 Quick Text Messages or to Sent Items. Press to If the Sent Items folder is empty:

The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. 6.9.21.3.1 Sending Quick Text Messages Follow the procedure to send Quick Text messages on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

a Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to Step 3. to select. Press to access the menu. Press or to Messages. Press to select. b Press select. or to Manual Dial. Press to The first line of the display shows Radio Number: and the second line shows a blinking cursor. Press select. or to Quick Text. Press to 4 Press or to the required Quick Text c Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming that your message is being sent. message. Press to select. If required, use the keypad to edit the message. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

Press once the message is composed. 6 Do the following to select the recipient and send the If unsuccessful:

message. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 2 3 5 English 347 The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 167 for more information. English 6.9.22 Privacy This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-

based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled transmissions. Some radio models may not offer Privacy feature, or may have a different configuration. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio supports the following types of privacy, but only one can be assigned to your radio. They are:

Basic Privacy Enhanced Privacy 348 To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key for Basic Privacy, or the same Key Value and Key ID for Enhanced Privacy as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Privacy Key, or different Key Value and Key ID, you either hear a garbled transmission for Basic Privacy or nothing at all for Enhanced Privacy. On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning tone or not, depending on how it is programmed. The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and double blinks when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. 6.9.22.1 Turning Privacy On or Off Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip the proceeding steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 4 Press or to <required privacy>. Press to select. If privacy is off, display shows empty box beside Enabled. English For example, you may want to disable a stolen radio to prevent unauthorized users from using it, and enable the radio when it is recovered. You will not receive an acknowledgment if you press during Radio Enable or Radio Disable operation. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.9.23.1 Disabling Radios 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. If privacy is on, display shows beside Enabled. Follow the procedure to disable your radio. 6.9.23 Security This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio in the system. 3 Press to select. The green LED blinks. 349 The display shows a positive mini notice. 4 Press or to Radio Disable. English 4 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.23.2 Disabling Radios by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the Contacts list. If unsuccessful:

Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 1 2 350 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 5 Press to select. The green LED blinks. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. English 6 Press or to Radio Disable. 7 Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.23.3 Disabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the manual dial. Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. or to Manual Dial. Press to If unsuccessful:

or to Radio Contact. Press to The first text line shows Radio Number:. 6.9.23.4 Enabling Radios Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. Follow the procedure to enable your radio. 351 English 6.9.23.5 352 1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. 3 Press to select. Enabling Radios by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the Contacts list. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up. Press to access the menu. 4 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press The display shows a positive mini notice. to select. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 1 2 5 4 Press or to Radio Enable. Press to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.23.6 Enabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the manual dial. English 4 5 7 Press select. or to Private Call. Press to The first text line shows Radio Number:. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. 6 Press or to Radio Enable. Press to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID>. The green LED lights up. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Contacts. Press to select. Press select. or to Manual Dial. Press to 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 353 The display shows a negative mini notice. English 6.9.24 Lone Worker Operation on page 326 for more information on ways to exit Emergency. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or channel selection, for a predefined time. 6.9.25 Notification List Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the inactivity timer expires. If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm. Only one of the following Emergency Alarms is assigned to this feature:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow The radio remains in the emergency state, allowing voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The display shows the Notification icon when the Notification list has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When the list is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification list. For text messages, missed calls, and call alert events, the maximum number of notifications are 30 text messages and 10 missed calls or call alerts. This maximum number depends on individual feature (job tickets or text messages or missed calls or call alerts) list capability. 354 6.9.25.1 Accessing Notification List 6.9.26 Auto-Range Transponder System English Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Notification button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to the required event. Press to Long press to return to the Home screen. The Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) is an analog-only feature designed to inform you when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-equipped radios. ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals periodically to confirm that they are within range of each other. Your radio provides indications of states as follows:

First-Time Alert A tone sounds. ARTS-in-Range Alert A tone sounds, if programmed. The display shows channel alias and In Range. ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert A tone sounds. The red LED rapidly blinks. The display shows Out of Range alternating with the Home screen. 355 or to Notification. Press to The display shows channel alias and In Range. English 356 NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.9.27 Over-the-Air Programming Your dealer can remotely update your radio through Over-

the-Air Programming (OTAP) without any physical connection. Additionally, some settings can also be configured by using OTAP. When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks. When your radio receives high volume data:

The display shows the High Volume Data icon. The channel becomes busy. screen. The display shows the OTAP Delay Timer icon until the automatic restart occurs. When your radio powers up after automatic restart:

If successful, the display shows Sw Update Completed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Sw Update Failed. See Checking Software Update Information on page 221 for the updated software version. 6.9.28 Password Lock You can set a password to restrict access to your radio. Each time you turn on your radio, you are asked to enter the password. A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button. Your radio supports a 4-digit password input. When OTAP completes, depending on the configuration:

Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. A tone sounds. The display shows Updating Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off and on again. You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When you select Postpone, your radio returns to the previous 6.9.28.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password Turn on your radio. 1 Enter the four-digit password. a To edit the numeric value of each digit, press or

. To enter and move to the next digit, press NOTICE:

In locked state, your radio responds to inputs from the On/Off/Volume Control Knob and programmed Backlight button only. 2 Press to confirm the password. If you enter the password correctly, the radio powers up. If you enter the wrong password after the first and second attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A continuous tone sounds. The display shows Wrong Password. Repeat step 1. If you enter the wrong password after the third attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Wrong Password and then, Radio Locked. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes. Wait for the 15-minute locked state timer to end and then repeat step 1. NOTICE:

If you turn off and turn your radio on again, the 15-

minute timer restarts. 6.9.28.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state. Do one of the following:

If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 185 to access the radio. If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Radio Locked. English 357 English 1 2 3 4 5 358 Press select. Press select. Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 185 to access the radio. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. 6.9.28.3 Changing Passwords Follow the procedure to change passwords on your radio. Press select. 6 7 or to Change PWD. Press to Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Passwd Lock. Press to Enter the current four-digit password, and press to proceed. Enter a new four-digit password, and press proceed. to 8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press to proceed. If successful, the display shows Password Changed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 6.9.29 Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7580e IS only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/

WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. English The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi remotely by using a designated radio (see Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) on page 191 and Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) on page 192). Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.9.29.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 1 Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. 2 Access this feature using the menu. 359 or to WiFi On and press to Long press the programmable button. Use the a Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to English b Press select. c Press select. d Press to turn on/off Wi-Fi. If Wi-Fi is on, the display shows Enabled. beside If Wi-Fi is off, the Enabled. disappears from beside 6.9.29.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Individual Control

(One to One). 360 NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Do one of the following:

keypad to enter the ID and press Proceed to step 4. to select. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Contacts and press to 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias:

Select the subscriber alias directly. Press or to the required subscriber alias or ID. Use the Manual Dial menu. Press or to Manual Dial and press to select. Select Radio Number and use the keypad to enter the ID. Press to select. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Group Control

(One to Many). English Press to select. or to WiFi Control and press 5 Press or to select On or Off. Press to select. If successful, the display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. 4 6 6.9.29.3 NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to 3 Press or to select the required subscriber 1 2 4 Press select. alias or ID. Press to select. or to WiFi Control and press 361 English 5 Press or to select On or Off. 6 Press to select. If successful, the display shows Sent Successfully. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. 6.9.29.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:

You can also connect to a network access point using the menu. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press to access the menu. 1 362 2 3 Press select. Press or to WiFi and press to select. or to Networks and press to 4 Press or to a network access point and press to select. NOTICE:

For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network access point is not preconfigured, the Connect option is not available. or to Connect and press to 6 For WPA-Personal Wi-Fi, enter the password and 5 Press select. press

. 7 For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured by using RM. Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio automatically connects to the selected network access point. If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the display shows Authentication Failure, and automatically returns to the previous menu. If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically returns to the previous menu. 6.9.29.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is turned off. The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the radio is connected to a network. The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected to any network. Voice Announcements for the Wi-Fi status query results can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. English 363 English 6.9.29.6 Refreshing the Network List 6.9.29.7 Adding a Network Perform the following actions to refresh the network list through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. Press to access the menu. or to Networks and press to Press or to WiFi and press to select. b. Press select. c. Press select. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Networks and press to or to Add Network and press to 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. Press select. or to Refresh and press to The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. 364 Press or to Open and press to select. Enter the password and press

. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the network is successfully saved. 5 Press to select. 6.9.29.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points You can view details of network access points. Press to access the menu. 6 7 1 2 3 Press or to WiFi and press to select. WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi Press select. or to Networks and press to English 4 Press or to a network access point and press to select. or to View Details and press NOTICE:

WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi display different details of Network Access Points. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID and Security Mode. For a connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2 Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2. 365 English For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name. 4 Press or to the selected network access point and press to select. 6.9.29.9 Removing Network Access Points NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. Press select. or to Networks and press to 1 2 3 366 5 6 Press or to Remove and press to select. Press or to Yes and press to select. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the selected network access point is successfully removed. 6.9.30 Front Panel Programming You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Programming (FPP) to enhance the use of your radio. The following buttons are used as required while navigating through the feature parameters. Up/Down/Left/Right Navigation Button Press to navigate through options horizontally or vertically, or increase or decrease values. English Menu/OK Button Press to select the option or enter a sub-menu. Editing Mode Parameters Return/Home Button Short press to return to the previous menu or exit the selection screen. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. Use the following buttons as required while navigating through the feature parameters.

, Scroll through options, increase/decrease values, or navigate vertically. 6.9.30.1 Entering Front Panel Programming Mode Select the option or enter a sub-menu. Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen. Press to access the menu. 6.10 Utilities Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Program Radio. Press to 1 2 3 Press select. 6.9.30.2 This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. 6.10.1 Keypad Lock Options With this feature, you can avoid accidentally pressing buttons or changing channels when your radio is not in use. 367 English You can choose to either lock your keypad, channel selector knob, or both; depending on your requirements. Your dealer can use CPS/RM to configure one of the following options:

Lock Keypad Lock Channel Selector Knob Lock Keypad and Channel Selector Knob Contact your dealer to determine how your radio has been programmed. 6.10.1.1 Enabling the Keypad Lock Option The following steps are applicable for either Lock Keypad, Lock Channel Selector Knob, or Lock Keypad and Channel Selector Knob option depending on how your radio has been configured. 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Keypad Lock. Press to The display shows Locked. 6.10.1.2 Disabling the Keypad Lock Option The following steps are applicable for either Lock Keypad, Lock Channel Selector Knob, or Lock Keypad and Channel Selector Knob option depending on how your radio has been configured. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Keypad Lock button. Skip the following steps. Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Keypad Lock button. Press to access the menu. 368 When the display shows Menu then * To 5 Do one of the following:

Unlock, press followed by

. The display shows Unlocked. 6.10.2 Turning Automatic Call Forwarding On or Off You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice calls to another radio. Press enabled, to enable Call Forwarding. If or appears beside Enabled. Press or to disable Call Forwarding. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.10.3 Identifying Cable Type Do the following steps to select the type of cable your radio uses. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 1 2 3 or to Call Forward. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. English 369 or to Cable Type. Press to Press to access the menu. or to Flexible Rx List. Press 2 Press to select. 3 Do one of the following:

or Press select. A positive indicator tone sounds. to Turn On. Press to The display shows a positive mini notice. or Press select. A negative indicator tone sounds. to Turn Off. Press to The display shows a negative mini notice. English 4 Press select. 5 Press or to change the selected option. The current cable type is indicated by a

. 6.10.4 Flexible Receive List Flexible Receive List is a feature that allows you to create and assign members on the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in the list. This feature is supported in Capacity Plus. 6.10.4.1 Turning Flexible Receive List On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Flexible Receive List on or off. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Flexible Receive List button. Skip the following steps. 370 6.10.4.2 Adding New Entries to the Flexible Receive List Follow the procedure to add new members to the receive talkgroup list. Press to access the menu. 6 Press select. or to Add Member. Press to 7 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice and then, Add Another?. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 8 Do one of the following:

or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to Yes to add another entry. Press to select. Repeat step 7. Press or to No to save the current list. or to Flexible Rx List. Press Press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press to select. Press select. or to View/Edit List. Press to English 371 6.10.4.3 Deleting Entries from the Flexible Receive List 6 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Follow the procedure to delete members of the receive talkgroup list from your radio. 7 Press or to Delete. Press to select. Press to access the menu. 8 Do one of the following:

Press or to Yes to delete the entry. Press Press or to Utilities. Press to select. to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to No. Press to select. or to Flexible Rx List. Press or to View/Edit List. Press to The radio returns to the previous screen. 9 Repeat step 6 to step 8 to delete other entries. 10 Long press deleting all required aliases or IDs. to return to the Home screen after English 1 2 3 4 5 372 Press select. Press to select. Press select. 6.10.4.4 Deleting Entries From the Flexible Receive List Using Alias Search Follow the procedure to delete members of the receive talkgroup list by using alias search. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities.Press to select. English 6 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 7 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. or to Radio Settings.Press to Press to select. 8 9 or to Flexible Rx List. Press or to View/Edit List. Press to Press or to Delete.Press to select. 10 Do one of the following:

Press or to Yes to delete the entry. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press to select. Press select. 373 English 11 1 2 3 374 Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. Press or to Display. Press to select. Long press deleting all required aliases or IDs. to return to the Home screen after 6.10.5 Setting Menu Timer Press select. Press to select. or to Menu Timer. Press to or to the required setting. Press You can set the time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. Follow the procedure to set the menu timer. 6.10.6 Setting Text-to-Speech Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 Press or to Voice Announcement. Press to select. 5 Press or to any of the following features. Press to select. The available features are as follows:

All Messages Job Tickets Channel Zone Program Button 6.10.7 English Turning Acoustic Feedback Suppressor On or Off The feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Follow the procedure to turn Acoustic Feedback Suppressor on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed AF Suppressor button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to AF Suppressor. Press to 5 Do one of the following:

375 appears beside the selected setting. or to Radio Settings. Press to English Press to enable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. Suppressor. Press to disable Acoustic Feedback If enabled, disappears beside Enabled. appears beside Enabled. If disabled, 6.10.8 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). 376 NOTICE:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 3 4 5 2 Do one of the following steps to toggle GNSS on or off on your radio. Press the programmed GNSS button. Press to access the menu. Proceed to the next step. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to GNSS. Press to select. Press to enable or disable GNSS. If enabled, If disabled, appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. 6.10.9 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen by following the procedure. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 6 1 2 3 4 English or to Intro Screen. Press to 5 6 Press select. Press Screen. to enable or disable the Introduction The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.10.10 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Skip 377 Press or to Display. Press to select. the following steps. English Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 6 6.10.11 378 Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. Follow the procedure to set the tones and alerts volume offset levels on your radio. or to Tones/Alerts. Press to Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or to All Tones. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press The display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable all tones and alerts. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. or to Tones/Alerts. Press to or to Vol. Offset. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. English or to Radio Settings. Press to 7 Do one of the following:

or to Tones/Alerts. Press to 6 Press or to the required volume offset level. A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding volume offset level. Press to select. The required volume offset level is saved. Press to exit. The changes are discarded. 6.10.12 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press Tone. or to Talk Permit. Press to to enable or disable the Talk Permit The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.10.13 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on your radio. 379 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. 6.10.14 380 Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Setting Text Message Alert Tones You can customize the text message alert tone for each entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text message alert tones on your radio. 1 2 4 or to Radio Settings. Press to Press to access the menu. or to Tones/Alerts. Press to Press or to Contacts. Press to select. 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press Press or to Power Up. Press to select. to select. Press The display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable the Power Up Tone. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press select. or to Message Alert. Press to 5 Do one of the following:

or Press select. The display shows to Momentary. Press to beside Momentary. English 4 5 or Press select. The display shows to Repetitive. Press to beside Repetitive. Press or to Display. Press to select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. 6.10.15 Changing Display Modes You can change the display mode of the radio between Day or Night, as needed. This feature affects the color palette of the display. Follow the procedure to change the display mode of your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Display Mode button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to the required setting. Press The display shows beside the selected setting. 6.10.16 Adjusting Display Brightness Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip the following steps. 2 3 Press select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press to access the menu. or to Radio Settings. Press to 2 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 381 English 3 4 Press select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press to access the menu. or to Brightness. Press to Press or to Utilities. Press to select. The display shows the progress bar. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 2 3 4 5 Press or to Display. Press to select. Press to select. or to Backlight Timer. Press The display backlight and keypad backlighting are automatically turned off as the LED indicator is disabled. See Turning LED Indicators On or Off on page 212 for more information. 5 Press or to decrease or increase the display brightness. Press to select. 6.10.17 Setting Display Backlight Timer You can set the display backlight timer of the radio as needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. Follow the procedure to set the backlight timer on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Backlight button. Skip the following steps. 382 6.10.18 Turning Backlight Auto On or Off If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. You can enable and disable the backlight of the radio to turn on automatically as needed. If enabled, the backlight is turned on when the radio receives a call, Notification List event, or Emergency Alarm. 6.10.19 Squelch Levels Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 4 Press or to Backlight Auto. 1 2 3 5 You can adjust the squelch level to filter out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels with noise higher than normal background. Normal Tight This is the default setting. This setting filters out unwanted calls and/or background noise. Calls from remote locations may also be filtered out. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Press to enable or disable Backlight Auto. The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. 6.10.19.1 Setting Squelch Levels Follow the procedure to set the squelch levels on your radio. English 383 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Squelch button. Skip the following steps. The display shows beside Tight. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 6.10.20 Turning LED Indicators On or Off Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on your radio. Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press to access the menu. Press or to Squelch. Press to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press or to Normal. Press to select. The display shows beside Normal. or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to Tight. Press to select. or to LED Indicator. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. English 2 3 4 384 5 1 2 3 4 Press to enable or disable the LED indicator. The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.10.21 Setting Languages Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. English 5 Press or to the required language. Press to select. The display shows beside the selected language. 6.10.22 Voice Operating Transmission The Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) allows you to initiate a hands-free voice-activated call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice. You can enable or disable VOX by doing one of the following:

Turn the radio off and then power it on again to enable Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to knob to enable VOX. Change the channel by using the Channel Selector Turn VOX on or off by using the programmed VOX button or menu to enable or disable VOX. Press or to Languages. Press to select. Press the PTT button during radio operation to disable VOX. VOX. 385 NOTICE:

Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4 Press or to VOX. Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

6.10.22.1 Turning Voice Operating Transmission On or Off Follow the procedure to turn VOX on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed VOX button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. Press or display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. The Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. NOTICE:

If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly into the microphone. See Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 207 for more information. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 6.10.23 Turning Option Board On or Off Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio. English 2 3 Press select. 386 Press the programmed Option Board button. 6.10.24 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the programmable button the user has just pressed. This is typically useful when the user has difficulty reading the content shown on the display. This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio. 3 5 Press select. or to Radio Settings. Press to 4 Press or to Voice Announcement. Press to select. Press Announcement. to enable or disable Voice If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Voice Announcement button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 6.10.25 Turning Analog Microphone AGC On or Off The Analog Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on an analog system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of English 387 audio. Follow the procedure to turn Analog Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to to enable or disable Analog Microphone The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. English 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press AGC. 388 6.10.26 Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on a digital system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Mic AGC-D. Press to or to Mic AGC-A. Press to Press to access the menu. 5 Press AGC. to enable or disable Digital Microphone Powering down the radio or detaching the accessory resets the audio routing to the internal radio speaker. The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.10.27 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Wired Accessory Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and wired accessory. You can toggle audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of a wired accessory with the condition that:

The wired accessory with speaker is attached. Press the programmed Audio Toggle button. A tone sounds when the audio route has switched. 6.10.28 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. English 389 English 2 3 Press select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select.

(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. or to Radio Settings. Press to 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button. Skip the steps below. 4 Press or to Intelligent Audio. Press Press to access the menu. to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press or display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. The or to Radio Settings. Press to Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. or to Trill Enhance. Press to 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. 6.10.29 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill 5 Do one of the following:

Press or display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. The 390 English Press or to Off. Press to select. The display shows beside Off. 5 Do one of the following:

6.10.30 Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On or Off This feature allows you to enable the radio to automatically monitor the microphone input and adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio clipping. Press to access the menu. Press to enable Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control. If enabled, Enabled. appears beside Press to disable Microphone Dynamic disappears Distortion Control. If disabled, beside Enabled. 6.10.31 Audio Ambience You can customize the audio ambience for your radio according to your environment. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Default This is the default setting. or to Radio Settings. Press to Loud or to Mic Distortion. Press to This setting enables Noise Suppressor and increases speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings. Work Group This setting enables AF Suppressor and disables AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each other. 391 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. English 6.10.31.1 Setting Audio Ambience Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your radio according to your environment. Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when using in noisy surroundings. Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback when using with a group of radios that are near to each other. The display shows beside the selected setting. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. 6.10.32 Audio Profiles or to Radio Settings. Press to You can customize the audio profiles for your radio according to your preference. or to Audio Ambience. Press to Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 Default This is the default setting. or to the required setting. Press Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost These settings are intended to compensate for noise-

induced hearing loss that is typical for adults in their 40s, 50s, and 60s or over. These settings are intended for a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper sound. The settings are as follows. Choose Default for the default factory settings. 1 2 3 4 5 392 Press select. Press select. Press to select. 6.10.32.1 Setting Audio Profiles Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio. Press to access the menu. English Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-

induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over 40 years of age. Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost for audio profiles that align with your preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper sounds. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press to select. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. The display shows beside the selected setting. or to Radio Settings. Press to or to Audio Profiles. Press to or to the required setting. Press 6.10.33 General Radio Information Your radio contains information on various general parameters. The general information of your radio is as follows:

Battery information. Radio alias and ID. Firmware and Codeplug versions. The settings are as follows. Choose Default to disable the previously selected audio profile and return to the default factory settings. Software update. GNSS information. Site information. 393 English Received Signal Strength Indicator. NOTICE:

Press to return to the previous screen. Long to return to the Home screen. The radio press exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. 6.10.33.1 Accessing Battery Information Displays information of your radio battery. Press to access the menu. 4 Press select. or to Battery Info. Press to NOTICE:

For IMPRES batteries only: The display reads Recondition Battery when the battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the reconditioning process, the display then shows the battery information. The display shows the battery information. NOTICE:

For non-supported battery, the display shows Unknown Battery. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to 6.10.33.2 Checking Radio Alias and ID 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button. Skip the following steps. A positive indicator tone sounds. 1 2 3 394 You can press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to Press or to Versions. Press to select. The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. 2 3 4 Press or to My Number. Press to select. The first text line shows the radio alias. The second text line shows the radio ID. 6.10.33.4 Checking GNSS Information Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:

6.10.33.3 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions Press to access the menu. Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity 2 3 4 1 English 395 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press to access the menu. Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) English Satellites Version Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to Press or to GNSS Info. Press to select. or to the required item. Press Press select. The display shows the requested GNSS information. to 1 2 3 4 5 6.10.33.5 396 Checking Software Update Information This feature shows the date and time of the latest software update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow the procedure to check the software update information on your radio. 1 2 3 4 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to Press or to SW Update. Press to select. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-Air Programming on page 356 for more information. 6.10.33.6 Displaying Site Information The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right corner. See Display Icons for more information on the RSSI icon. Follow the procedure to display the current site name your radio is on. 6.10.34.1 Viewing RSSI Values 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press or to Utilities. Press to select. At the home screen, press three times and immediately press

, all in 5 seconds. The display shows the current RSSI values. Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to To return to the home screen, press and hold

. Press or to Site Info. Press to select. The display shows the current site name. 6.10.34 Received Signal Strength Indicator This feature allows you to view the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) values. 6.10.35 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate. 1 Press to access the menu. English 397 English 2 3 Press or to Utilities. Press to select. Press to select. or to Certificate Menu. Press appears beside ready certificates. 4 Press or to the required certificate. Press to select. Your radio displays the full details of the certificate. NOTICE:

For unready certificates, the display shows only Status. 398 Authorized Accessories List Batteries MOTOTRBO CSA Li-Ion, 2300mA (NNTN8386_) Motorola Solutions provides a list of accessories to improve the productivity of your radio. Carry Devices 2.5 in. Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop

(PMLN5610_) Antenna

(PMAE4018_)

(PMAE4023_)

(PMAE4024_)

(PMAD4067_)

(PMAD4068_)

(PMAD4069_) UHF, 403-433MHz, GPS Folded Monopole Antenna EX Belt Clip for 2.5 in. Belt Width (PMLN6086_) UHF, 430-470MHz, GPS Stubby Antenna EX for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN6097_) Hard Leather Carry Case with 2.5 in. Swivel Belt Loop UHF, 430-470MHz, GPS Folded Monopole Antenna EX Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN6099_) Soft Leather Carry Case with 2.5 in. Swivel Belt Loop for VHF, 136-147MHz, GPS Helical Antenna EX Chargers VHF, 147-160MHz, GPS Helical Antenna EX VHF, 160-174MHz, GPS Helical Antenna EX VHF, 136-174MHz, Wide Band Antenna (PMAD4088_) 800/900, 896-941MHz, Coaxial Whip (NAF5088_) 800/900, 806-870MHz, Coaxial Whip (NAF5087_) IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger, US/NA Plug (WPLN4212_) IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger with Display, Base Only

(WPLN4218_) IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger with Display, US/NA Plug

(WPLN4219_) IMPRES Single-Unit Charger, Base Only (WPLN4226_) IMPRES Single Unit Charger (WPLN4232_) English 399 English IMPRES Single-Unit Charger with Switch Mode Power Supply US Cord (WPLN4253_) Receive-only Headset (RMN4054_)13 Standard Hardhat Mount Headset, 24 NRR IMPRES Vehicular Charger (NNTN7616_) Wall Mount Bracket for IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger Standard Hardhat Mount Headset, 26 NRR

(NNTN8379_)13

(NNTN8380_)13

(NLN7967_) Travel Charger (NNTN8525_) Earbuds and Earpieces Receive-Only Earpiece (RLN4941_) Earphone with Acoustic Tube (Black) (RLN5313_) D-Shell Receive-Only Earpiece (PMLN4620_)11 Receive-Only Earpiece (RLN4885_)11 Simple Ear Bud (Black) (BDN6781_)12 Earphone with Acoustic Tube (Beige) (RLN5314_)12 Remote Speaker Microphones IMPRES Noise Canceling Remote Speaker Microphone with Audio Jack (PMMN4050_) IMPRES ATEX CSA Remote Speaker Microphone

(PMMN4067_) Remote Speaker Microphone, Noise Canceling, IP57

(NNTN8382_)

(NNTN8383_) Remote Speaker Microphone, Noise Canceling, IP54 Headsets and Headset Accessories Behind the Head Heavy Duty Headset (PMLN5275_)13 Miscellaneous Accessories Universal Connector Dust Cover for MOTOTRBO ATEX CSA (15012157001_) 11 Only applicable for XPR 7580e IS. 12 Only applicable for XPR 7550 IS. 13 For use with NNTN8378_ 400 ATEX Adapter with Molex Jack (PMLN6047_) CSA Push-to-Talk Adapter (NNTN8378_) English 401 English Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude 402 bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements Table 17: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

Frequency (MHz) ber Transmit A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. NOTICE:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. 1 2

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 English Receive 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 403 English 16 17**

18 19 20 22

24 25 26 27 28 60

62 63

404 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 67**

65 66 68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 78 79 80

77**

156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 NOTICE:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. NOTICE:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime English use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources Table 18: Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources RS232 18 V USB 3.6 V SB9600 5 V Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impe-

dance 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm 405 Nickel Metal-Hydride

(NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Li-

lon) Batteries IMPRES Batteries, When Used Exclusively with IM-

PRES Chargers 12 Months 18 Months English Batteries and Chargers Warranty The Workmanship Warranty The workmanship warranty guarantees against defects in workmanship under normal use and service. All MOTOTRBO Batteries IMPRES Chargers (Sin-

gle-Unit and Multi-Unit, Non-Display) IMPRES Chargers (Multi-

Unit with Display) 24 Months 24 Months 12 Months The Capacity Warranty The capacity warranty guarantees 80% of the rated capacity for the warranty duration. 406 Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

Motorola Solutions, Inc. ("Motorola Solutions") warrants the Motorola Solutions manufactured Communication Products listed below ("Product") against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

Portable Radios Product Accessories (Ex-

cluding Batteries and Chargers) Two (2) Years One (1) Year Motorola Solutions, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty English period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of Motorola Solutions. This express limited warranty is extended by Motorola Solutions to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of Motorola Solutions. Unless made in a separate agreement between Motorola Solutions and the original end user purchaser, Motorola Solutions does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. Motorola Solutions cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, Motorola Solutions 407 English disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

II. GENERAL PROVISIONS This warranty sets forth the full extent of Motorola Solutions responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at Motorola Solutions option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola Solutions through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (for example, dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola Solutions at 1-800-927-2744. 408 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER 1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. English neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-

Motorola Solutions supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola Solutions normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with Motorola Solutions published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from Motorola Solutions. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS Motorola Solutions will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola Solutions will pay those 409 English costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 Motorola Solutions will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 Motorola Solutions will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 Should the Product or parts become, or in Motorola Solutions opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit Motorola Solutions, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions, nor will Motorola Solutions have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of Motorola Solutions with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola Solutions software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola Solutions software. Motorola Solutions software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such Motorola Solutions software or exercise of rights in such Motorola Solutions software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under Motorola Solutions patent rights or copyrights. Motorola Solutions will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by VII. GOVERNING LAW This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. 410

 

 

en-US RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Portable Two-Way Radios fr-CA Formation sur lexposition aux RF et information sur la scurit du produit pour radios bidirectionnelles portatives es-LA Capacitacin sobre la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia e informacin de proteccin del producto para radios de dos vas porttiles pt-BR Treinamento sobre a Exposio Energia de RF e Informaes de Segurana do Produto para Rdios Portteis Bidirecionais https://learning.motorolasolutions.com/User_Documentation Caution Before using this radio, read this booklet which contains important operating instructions. For information on product details, brochures, user manuals and approved accessories. Please refer to www.motorolasolutions.com. Compliance with RF Exposure Standards National and international regulations require manufacturers to comply with the RF energy exposure limits for portable two-way radios before they can be marketed. Your Motorola Solutions two-way radio is designed, manufactured, and tested to comply with all applicable national and international regulations for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, applicable regulations may require users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information and Operational Instructions for Occupational Use Notice: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions where users are aware of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet the requirements in national and international regulations. This radio device is not authorized for general population, consumer use. For more information on what RF energy exposure is, and how to control your exposure to ensure compliance with established RF exposure limits, consult the following websites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html For additional user training information on exposure requirements, consult the following websites:

English https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/

corporate-responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-

communication-and-health-faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines To control your exposure, and ensure compliance with the relevant RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following guidelines:

Do not remove any of the RF Exposure Labels if present from this device or its related accessories. Attach these instructions to the device when you transfer it to other Do not use this device if the operational requirements described users. herein are not met. Operating Instructions Transmit no more than 50% of the time. To transmit (talk), press the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls, release the PTT button. Transmitting more than 50% of the time may cause RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. Hold the radio in a vertical position in front of the face with the microphone (and other parts of the radio including the antenna) at least 1 in. (2.5 cm) away from the nose or lips. Antenna should be kept away from the eye. When worn on the body, always place the radio in a Motorola Solutions-approved clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this product. DO NOT hold the antenna when the radio is transmitting. DO NOT use any portable radio that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. To ensure continued compliance with applicable RF exposure limits, use only Motorola Solutions approved, supplied or replacement antennas, batteries, and accessories. For a list of Motorola Solutions approved accessories please refer to your user manual or visit www.motorolasolutions.com 1 English Acoustic Safety Exposure to loud noises from any source for extended periods of time may temporarily or permanently affect your hearing. The louder the volume of the radio, the sooner your hearing will be affected. Hearing damage from loud noise is sometimes undetectable at first, and can have a cumulative effect. To protect your hearing:

Use the lowest volume necessary to do your job. Turn up the volume only if you are in noisy surroundings. Turn down the volume before adding headset or earpiece. Limit the amount of time you use headsets or earpieces at high volume. When using the radio without a headset or earpiece, do not place the radio's speaker directly against your ear. Medical Devices If you use a personal medical device, such as a pacemaker or hearing aid, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Holsters Incorporating Magnets Some Motorola Solutions holsters incorporate strong, neodymium magnets. If you use a personal medical device, such as a pacemaker or hearing aid, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it can be used in close proximity to magnets. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Also be aware that magnets can damage other products, including cell phones, computers, hard drives, and other electronic devices, as well as credit cards and magnetic media. Keep the holster away from any mechanical device that could be affected by a magnetic field. Consult the manufacturer of your product to determine if your device or product can be used in close proximity to magnets. Notice to Users (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. 2 The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. Operational Warnings The following explains the operational warnings:

For Vehicle With Air Bags Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Warning:

Refer to vehicle manufacturer's manual prior to installation of electronic equipment to avoid interference with air bag wiring. DO NOT place a portable radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Warning:

Do not carry a radio that is not certified for Hazardous Locations into a potentially explosive atmosphere. It could result in a serious injury or death. You should only use a radio certified for hazardous locations in potentially explosive atmospheres. Explosive atmospheres refer to hazard classified locations that may contain hazardous gas, vapors, dusts, such as fueling areas below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transferor storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas, or remove or install antennas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas Warning: To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Batteries Caution: Use only Motorola Solutions approved batteries. Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Charge your battery using the approved Motorola Solutions charger. Connect the charger/power supply to a nearby and easily accessible Use the battery in accordance with its water and/or dust Ingress power outlet. Protection (IP) rating. Do not discard your battery into a fire. Do not replace the battery in any area labeled "Hazardous Atmosphere". Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source, such as a hair dryer or microwave oven. Do not allow conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains to touch exposed battery terminals. Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. Repair Warning:

Repairs to a Motorola Solutions intrinsically safe radio product certified by, for example, FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC, should only be done at a location that has been audited under the certifying body's repair and service standard. Contact Motorola Solutions for assistance regarding repairs and service of Motorola Solutions intrinsically safe equipment. A repair constitutes something done internally to the unit that would bring it back to its original condition. English Items not considered as repairs are those in which an action is performed on a unit which does not require the outer casing of the unit to be opened in a manner that exposes the internal electrical circuits of the unit. Do Not Substitute Options or Accessories The Motorola Solutions communications equipment certified as intrinsically safe by the approving agency (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC) is tested as a complete system which consists of the listed agency Approved portable, Approved battery, and Approved accessories or options, or both. This Approved portable and battery combination must be strictly observed. There must be no substitution of items, even if the substitute has been previously Approved with a different Motorola Solutions communications equipment unit. Approved configurations are listed by the Approving Agency (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). The Intrinsically Safe Approval Label affixed to radio refers to the intrinsically safe classification of that radio product, and the approved batteries that can be used with that system. The manual PN referenced on the Intrinsically Safe Approval Label identifies the approved Accessories and or options that can be used with that portable radio unit. Using a non-Motorola Solutions-intrinsically safe battery and/or accessory with the Motorola Solutions approved radio unit will void the intrinsically safe approval of that radio unit. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product

(or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 3 For Brazil, information for disposal and recycling of electronic waste, batteries, and packaging, please call: 0800168272. English 4 Mise en garde Avant d'utiliser cette radio, lisez cette brochure qui contient d'importantes consignes d'utilisation. Pour obtenir plus dinformation sur les dtails du produit, les brochures, les manuels et les accessoires approuvs, Veuillez vous reporter www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformit aux normes sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences Les rglementations nationales et internationales noncent que les fabricants doivent sassurer que leurs produits sont conformes aux limites dexposition l'nergie RF avant de les commercialiser. Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola Solutions a t conue, fabrique et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes nationales et internationales lies l'exposition des tres humains l'nergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, la rglementation en vigueur exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de l'exposition et qu'ils soient capables de contrler le niveau d'exposition auquel ils se soumettent afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Information de sensibilisation et de gestion de l'exposition l'nergie RF, et consignes pour l'utilisation professionnelle Avis: Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de l'exposition l'nergie RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par les rglements nationaux et internationaux. Ce dispositif radio n'est pas autoris pour l'utilisation grand public par des consommateurs ordinaires. Franais (Canada) https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html Pour plus de renseignements sur la formation des utilisateurs relativement aux limites d'exposition, consultez les sites suivants :

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/

corporate-responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-

communication-and-health-faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

Directives de conformit et de contrle de l'exposition aux RF Pour contrler votre exposition et garantir le respect des limites d'exposition applicables, observez toujours les consignes suivantes. Ne pas retirer les tiquettes relatives l'exposition aux RF qui sont apposes sur cet appareil ou sur ses accessoires. Joignez ces directives l'appareil lorsque vous le transfrez d'autres utilisateurs. N'utilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites aux prsentes ne sont pas runies. Consignes dutilisation Ne pas mettre plus de 50 % du temps. Pour transmettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton (PTT). Pour recevoir les appels, relchez le bouton PTT. Le fait de transmettre plus de 50 % du temps peut entraner le dpassement de la limite dexposition normalise au rayonnement RF. Tenez la radio la verticale devant le visage, en maintenant une distance dau moins 2,5 centimtres (1 pouce) entre le micro (et les autres parties de la radio, y compris lantenne) et le nez ou les lvres. Lantenne doit tre maintenue loin des yeux. Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce qu'est l'nergie RF et sur les moyens de contrle prendre afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire d'exposition aux radiofrquences :

Lorsque vous portez la radio sur vous, fixez-la toujours avec une pince ou une attache de ceinture et placez-la dans un tui ou un harnais approuv par Motorola Solutions pour l'utilisation avec ce produit. 1 Franais (Canada) NE TENEZ PAS lantenne entre vos doigts pendant que la radio met. N'UTILISEZ PAS une radio portative, quelle quelle soit, dont lantenne est endommage. Si une antenne endommage entre en contact avec votre peau, il peut en rsulter une brlure lgre. Pour assurer la conformit continue avec les limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, utilisez uniquement les antennes, les batteries et les accessoires de remplacement ou fournis et approuvs par Motorola Solutions. Pour obtenir une liste des accessoires approuvs par Motorola Solutions, veuillez consulter votre manuel ou visitez le site www.motorolasolutions.com Protection de l'oue Une exposition des bruits forts en provenance de n'importe quelle source pendant de longues priodes pourrait affecter votre audition de manire temporaire ou permanente. Plus le volume de la radio est lev, plus le dommage pour l'oue survient rapidement. Des dommages auditifs dus l'exposition des bruits forts peuvent ne pas tre dcels immdiatement, mais leurs effets sont parfois cumulatifs. Pour protger votre audition :

Rglez le volume le plus bas possible pour effectuer votre travail. Montez le volume seulement si vous vous trouvez dans un environnement bruyant. Baissez le volume avant dajouter un casque ou une oreillette. Limitez la priode de temps dutilisation de casques ou dcouteurs volume lev. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio sans casque ni couteur, ne placez pas le haut-parleur directement sur votre oreille. Appareils mdicaux Si vous utilisez un dispositif mdical personnel, comme un stimulateur cardiaque ou une prothse auditive, consultez le fabricant de votre appareil pour dterminer s'il est convenablement protg contre les RF. Votre mdecin peut vous aider obtenir ces renseignements. tuis incorporant des aimants Certains tuis Motorola Solutions intgrent des aimants puissants en nodyme. Si vous utilisez un dispositif mdical personnel, comme un 2 stimulateur cardiaque ou une prothse auditive, consultez le fabricant de votre appareil pour dterminer s'il peut tre utilis proximit d'aimants. Votre mdecin peut vous aider obtenir ces renseignements. Notez galement que les aimants peuvent endommager d'autres produits, notamment les tlphones cellulaires, les ordinateurs, les disques durs et autres appareils lectroniques, ainsi que les cartes de crdit et les supports magntiques. Gardez l'tui loin de tout dispositif mcanique qui pourrait tre affect par un champ magntique. Consultez le fabricant de votre produit pour savoir si votre appareil ou votre produit peut tre utilis proximit d'aimants. Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC) Cet appareil est conforme la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC daprs les conditions suivantes :

Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible. L'appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans lautorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler lautorisation dutiliser cet appareil. Avertissements de fonctionnement Le tableau suivant explique les avertissements de fonctionnement :

Pour vhicules quips de coussins gonflables Avertissement:

Consultez le manuel du fabricant du vhicule avant d'installer un appareil lectronique afin d'viter toute interfrence avec le cblage des coussins gonflables. NE PLACEZ PAS de radio portative dans la zone situe au-

dessus d'un coussin gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Un coussin gonflable de scurit se dploie avec beaucoup de force. Si une radio portative se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du coussin, lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors d'occasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers du vhicule. Atmosphres potentiellement explosives Avertissement:

Ne transportez pas une radio qui n'est pas certifie pour les emplacements dangereux dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. Cela pourrait entraner des blessures graves ou la mort. Vous ne devez utiliser qu'une radio certifie pour les endroits dangereux dans les atmosphres potentiellement explosives. On retrouve des atmosphres explosives dans les lieux classs comme tant dangereux en raison de la prsence de gaz, de vapeurs et de poussires reprsentant un danger, par exemple, les zones d'avitaillement en carburant dans des cales de bateau, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques, et les zones dans lesquelles l'air est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas. VITEZ d'enlever, d'installer ou de charger les batteries, ou d'enlever ou d'installer des antennes dans de tels lieux. Les tincelles dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles, voire la mort. Zone de dynamitage et dtonateurs Avertissement: teignez la radio lorsque vous vous trouvez proximit de dtonateurs lectriques ou dans une zone de dynamitage afin dviter de dclencher une explosion, ou lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un endroit o il est indiqu :

teindre les radios bidirectionnelles . Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. Batteries Solutions. Mise en garde: Utilisez uniquement les batteries agres par Motorola Solutions. La batterie risque d'exploser si elle n'est pas correctement remplace. Chargez votre batterie l'aide du chargeur approuv par Motorola Franais (Canada) Branchez le chargeur/bloc d'alimentation une prise murale proximit facilement accessible. Utilisez la batterie conformment son indice de protection (IP) contre l'eau et la poussire. Ne jetez pas votre batterie au feu. Ne remplacez pas la batterie dans un endroit qui porte la mention atmosphre dangereuse . Veillez ne pas dmonter, craser, percer, dcouper ou autrement modifier la forme de votre batterie. Ne faites pas scher une batterie mouille ou humide avec un appareil lectrique ou une source de chaleur, comme un schoir cheveux ou un four micro-ondes. Ne permettez pas des matriaux conducteurs, comme des bijoux, des cls ou des mailles de chane dentrer en contact avec les bornes de la batterie. Ne jetez pas les batteries avec les ordures domestiques. Rparations Avertissement:

La rparation d'une radio de scurit intrinsque de Motorola Solutions homologue, notamment, par FM, UL, CSA ou CENELEC, doit tre effectue uniquement un endroit ayant fait l'objet d'une vrification en vertu de la norme sur les rparations et l'entretien de l'organisme de certification. Contactez Motorola Solutions afin d'obtenir de l'assistance pour l'entretien et la rparation d'une unit Motorola Solutions scurit intrinsque. Le terme rparation dsigne tout travail effectu sur les composants internes de l'unit afin de la ramener son tat d'origine. Un travail qui ne ncessite pas l'ouverture du botier de l'unit afin d'en exposer les circuits lectriques internes ne constitue pas une rparation. vitez de substituer des options ou des accessoires. L'quipement de communications Motorola Solutions certifi de scurit intrinsque par l'entit d'homologation (FMRC, UL, CSA, CENELEC) est test en tant que systme complet, savoir : la radio portative, la batterie, les accessoires et les options, tous agrs par l'entit correspondante. L'intgrit de cette configuration forme d'une radio portative et d'une batterie agres doit tre strictement respecte. 3 Franais (Canada) Aucune substitution d'lment n'est permise, mme si l'lment de remplacement a pralablement t agr pour une autre unit de communication Motorola Solutions. Les configurations agres peuvent tre consultes dans la liste mise disposition par l'entit d'homologation (FMRC, UL, CSA, CENELEC). L'tiquette d'homologation de scurit intrinsque appose sur la radio identifie la classification de scurit intrinsque de cette radio ainsi que les batteries agres qui peuvent tre utilises avec ce systme. Le numro de rfrence du manuel mentionn sur l'tiquette d'homologation de scurit intrinsque identifie les accessoires et/ou les options agrs qui peuvent tre utiliss avec cette unit de radio portative. Le fait de ne pas utiliser une batterie ou un accessoire Motorola Solutions de scurit intrinsque avec l'unit de radio Motorola Solutions agre annule l'homologation de scurit intrinsque de cette unit de radio. Directive sur la mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques de lUnion europenne (UE)

(WEEE) La directive WEEE de lUnion europenne exige que les produits (ou leur emballage, dans certains cas) vendus dans les pays de lUE portent ltiquette de la poubelle barre. Comme le dfinit la directive WEEE, cette tiquette de poubelle barre signifie que les clients et les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE ne doivent pas jeter les quipements lectriques et lectroniques ou leurs accessoires dans les ordures domestiques. Les clients ou les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE doivent communiquer avec le reprsentant ou le centre de service de leur fournisseur dquipement pour obtenir des renseignements sur le systme de collecte des dchets de leur pays. Pour obtenir des renseignements sur l'limination et le recyclage des dchets lectroniques, des batteries et des emballages pour le Brsil, veuillez appeler : 0800168272. 4 Precaucin Antes de usar este radio, lea el folleto que contiene instrucciones de funcionamiento importantes. Para obtener informacin sobre los detalles del producto, folletos, manuales de usuario y accesorios aprobados. consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidad con las normas de exposicin a radiofrecuencia Las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales obligan a que los fabricantes cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia para radios porttiles de dos vas antes de que se puedan comercializar. El radio de dos vas de Motorola Solutions est diseado, fabricado y probado para cumplir con todas las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales correspondientes en materia de exposicin humana a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Cuando los radios de dos vas se usan para trabajar, las regulaciones correspondientes podran exigir que los usuarios conozcan y controlen su nivel de exposicin para cumplir con los requisitos de uso profesional. Conocimiento de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia, informacin de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para uso ocupacional Nota: Este radio est diseado para usarse en condiciones controladas o profesionales, donde los usuarios tengan pleno conocimiento de su exposicin y puedan controlarla con el fin de cumplir con los requisitos de las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales. Este dispositivo de radio no est autorizado para el uso particular de la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms informacin sobre el significado de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia y cmo controlar la exposicin con el fin de asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias establecidos, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en Espaol (Latinoamrica) http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html Para obtener informacin adicional de la capacitacin de los usuarios sobre los requisitos de exposicin, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/

corporate-responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-

communication-and-health-faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

Cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia y pautas de control Para controlar la exposicin y garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias correspondientes, respete siempre las siguientes pautas:

No retire ninguna de las etiquetas de exposicin a radiofrecuencias, si las hubiere, de este dispositivo o sus accesorios respectivos. Adjunte estas instrucciones al dispositivo cuando se lo transfiera a otros usuarios. No utilice este dispositivo si no se cumple con los requisitos de funcionamiento descritos en este documento. Instrucciones de funcionamiento No transmita ms de un 50 % del tiempo. Para transmitir (hablar), presione el botn Push-to-Talk (PTT). Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Una transmisin superior al 50 % del tiempo de uso podra provocar que se superen los requisitos de cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Sostenga el radio en posicin vertical frente a su rostro con el micrfono (y otras partes del radio, incluida la antena) al menos a 2,5 cm (1 pulg.) de distancia de la nariz o los labios. Mantenga la antena alejada de los ojos. Siempre que use el radio ajustado al cuerpo, pngalo en un clip, un soporte, un estuche, una funda o un arns para el cuerpo aprobado por Motorola Solutions para este producto. NO sujete la antena mientras el radio est realizando una transmisin. 1 Espaol (Latinoamrica) NO utilice radios porttiles que tengan la antena daada. Si una antena daada toca su piel, puede causar una pequea quemadura. Para garantizar el cumplimiento continuo de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes, utilice solamente las antenas, las bateras y los accesorios de repuesto suministrados o aprobados por Motorola Solutions. telfonos celulares, computadoras, discos duros y otros dispositivos electrnicos, adems de las tarjetas de crdito y los medios magnticos. Mantenga la funda lejos de cualquier dispositivo mecnico que el campo magntico pueda afectar. Consulte con el fabricante del producto para determinar si el dispositivo o el producto se pueden utilizar cerca de imanes. Para obtener una lista de los accesorios aprobados por Motorola Solutions, consulte el manual del usuario o visite www.motorolasolutions.com. Seguridad acstica La exposicin a ruidos fuertes de cualquier fuente durante perodos prolongados podra afectar la audicin de manera temporal o permanente. Cuanto ms alto sea el volumen del radio, ms rpido se ver afectada la audicin. En ocasiones, el dao a la audicin provocado por ruidos fuertes es indetectable en un principio y puede tener efecto acumulativo. Para proteger la audicin:

Utilice el volumen ms bajo que necesite para hacer su trabajo. Aumente el volumen solo si se encuentra en un ambiente ruidoso. Reduzca el volumen antes de conectar los auriculares o el audfono. Limite el tiempo durante el cual usa los auriculares o los audfonos a volumen alto. Cuando use el radio sin audfonos o auriculares, no coloque el altavoz del radio directamente en la oreja. Aparatos mdicos Si utiliza un dispositivo mdico, como un marcapasos o una prtesis auditiva, consulte al fabricante del dispositivo para determinar si est adecuadamente protegido contra las energas de radiofrecuencia. Su mdico podra ayudarlo a obtener esta informacin. Fundas con imanes Algunas fundas de Motorola Solutions incluyen imanes de neodimio resistentes. Si utiliza un dispositivo mdico personal, como un marcapasos o una prtesis auditiva, consulte con el fabricante del dispositivo para determinar si se puede utilizar cerca de imanes. Su mdico podra ayudarlo a obtener esta informacin. Adems, tenga presente que los imanes pueden daar otros productos, incluidos Nota para los usuarios (FCC) Este dispositivo cumple con la Parte 15 de las normas de la FCC segn las siguientes condiciones:

Este dispositivo no puede provocar interferencia nociva. El dispositivo debe aceptar toda interferencia recibida, incluida aquella interferencia que pudiera causar un funcionamiento no deseado. Los cambios o las modificaciones que se realicen en este dispositivo, no aprobados expresamente por Motorola Solutions, podran anular el permiso del usuario de operar este equipo. Advertencias de funcionamiento A continuacin, se explican las advertencias de funcionamiento:

Para vehculos con bolsas de aire Advertencia:

Consulte el manual del fabricante del vehculo antes de instalar equipos electrnicos, a fin de evitar la interferencia en el cableado de las bolsas de aire. NO coloque el radio porttil sobre una bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de la bolsa. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se pone un radio porttil en el rea de despliegue de la bolsa de aire y esta se infla, es posible que el radio salga disparado con gran fuerza y cause lesiones graves a los ocupantes del vehculo. Atmsferas potencialmente explosivas Advertencia:

No lleve un radio que no est certificado para lugares peligrosos a una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva. Puede provocar lesiones graves o la muerte. En atmsferas potencialmente explosivas, solo debe utilizar un radio certificado para lugares peligrosos. 2 Espaol (Latinoamrica) El trmino atmsferas explosivas se refiere a lugares No permita que materiales conductores como joyas, llaves o cadenas clasificados como peligrosos en los que podra haber gases, vapores o polvos peligrosos, como reas con combustibles bajo las cubiertas de los botes o instalaciones de almacenamiento o transferencia de qumicos, y reas en que el aire contenga productos qumicos o partculas, como material granulado, polvo o polvo metlico. A menudo, en las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. NO retire, instale ni cargue bateras, ni tampoco retire o instale antenas en dichas reas. Las chispas en ambientes potencialmente explosivos pueden desencadenar una explosin o un incendio, y ocasionar lesiones o incluso la muerte. reas de voladuras y explosivos Advertencia: Para evitar posibles interferencias en operaciones de voladuras, apague el radio cuando se encuentre cerca de zonas de voladuras elctricas, en un rea de explosivos o en reas donde se encuentre el siguiente aviso: Apague el radio de dos vas. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Bateras Precaucin: Utilice nicamente bateras aprobadas por Motorola Solutions. Existe un riesgo de explosin si sustituye la batera por otra de una clase incorrecta. Cargue la batera con cargadores aprobados por Motorola Solutions. Conecte el cargador/la fuente de alimentacin a una toma de corriente cercana y de fcil acceso. Utilice la batera de acuerdo con su clasificacin de proteccin de ingreso (IP) contra polvo y agua. No arroje la batera al fuego. No cambie la batera en un rea designada como Atmsfera peligrosa. No desarme, rompa, perfore, triture ni intente cambiar de ningn otro modo la forma de la batera. No intente secar una batera mojada o hmeda con un electrodomstico o una fuente de calor externa, como un secador de pelo o un horno microondas. hagan contacto con los terminales expuestos de la batera. No bote las bateras en la basura domstica. Reparaciones Advertencia:

Las reparaciones de productos de un radio Motorola Solutions intrnsecamente seguro certificado, por ejemplo, FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC, deben realizarse solo en una ubicacin que haya sido auditada segn el estndar de reparacin y servicio de la entidad certificante. Comunquese con Motorola Solutions para solicitar asistencia relacionada con reparaciones y tareas de servicio de los equipos Motorola Solutions intrnsecamente seguros. Una reparacin consta de algo hecho en el interior de la unidad que debe devolverla a su estado original. Las instancias que no se consideran reparaciones son las que incluyen una accin realizada en una unidad que no requiere que la cubierta externa se abra de manera tal que queden expuestos los circuitos elctricos de la unidad. No sustituya los elementos opcionales ni los accesorios Los equipos de comunicaciones de Motorola Solutions que cuentan con un certificado que indica que son intrnsecamente seguros, emitido por una agencia de aprobacin (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC), se prueban como sistemas completos que incluyen: el dispositivo porttil aprobado, la batera aprobada y los accesorios o los elementos opcionales aprobados, o ambos. Debe respetar de manera estricta esta combinacin de dispositivo porttil y batera aprobada. No se deben sustituir los elementos, aun si la pieza de sustitucin se prob anteriormente para otro equipo de comunicaciones Motorola Solutions. Las configuraciones aprobadas son detalladas por la agencia de aprobacin (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). La etiqueta de aprobacin como intrnsecamente seguro adherida al radio indica la clasificacin de intrnsecamente seguro de ese radio e indica las bateras aprobadas que pueden usarse con ese sistema. La etiqueta de aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro adherida al radio hace referencia a un nmero de pieza del manual que indica los 3 Espaol (Latinoamrica) accesorios o los elementos opcionales que se pueden usar con la unidad de radio porttil. El uso de una batera o un accesorio aprobado como intrnsecamente seguro que no sea de Motorola Solutions con el radio Motorola Solutions aprobado anular la aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro de esa unidad de radio. Directiva de Residuos de Aparatos Elctricos y Electrnicos (RAEE) de la Unin Europea (UE) La directiva de RAEE de la Unin Europea requiere que los productos que se venden en los pases de la UE tengan la etiqueta de un bote de residuos tachado sobre el producto (o en el paquete en algunos casos). Como se define en la Directiva de RAEE, esta etiqueta con un bote de basura tachado indica que los clientes y los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE no deben deshacerse de los equipos o accesorios elctricos y electrnicos con la basura domstica. Los clientes o los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE deben comunicarse con su representante distribuidor de equipos o el centro de servicio locales para obtener informacin sobre el sistema de recoleccin de residuos de su pas. Para Brasil, informacin de eliminacin y reciclaje de desechos electrnicos, bateras y embalajes, llame al: 0800168272. 4 Ateno Antes de usar o rdio, leia este folheto, que contm importantes instrues de operao. Para obter informaes sobre detalhes do produto, folhetos, manuais do usurio e acessrios aprovados. Consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidade com os Padres de Exposio RF Os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais exigem que os fabricantes estejam em conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF para rdios portteis bidirecionais antes de serem comercializados. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola Solutions foi projetado, fabricado e testado para estar em conformidade com todos os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais para exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofrequncia. Ao usar rdios bidirecionais por motivos de trabalho, os regulamentos aplicveis podem exigir que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes e aptos a controlar sua exposio de modo a atender s exigncias ocupacionais. Informaes sobre Conscientizao e Controle de Exposio Energia de RF e Instrues Operacionais para o Uso Ocupacional Comunicado: Este rdio destina-se ao uso em condies ocupacionais/controladas, em que os usurios estejam cientes de sua exposio e possam exercer controle sobre ela, para atender aos requisitos nos regulamentos nacionais e internacionais. O uso do dispositivo de rdio pela populao em geral no autorizado. Para obter mais informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e como controlar a exposio para garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html Portugus (Brasil) Para informaes adicionais de treinamento sobre os requisitos de exposio, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/

corporate-responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-

communication-and-health-faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle de Exposio RF Para controlar a exposio e garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF em questo, siga sempre as diretrizes a seguir:

No remova as Etiquetas de Exposio RF, se houverem, do dispositivo ou acessrios relacionados. Anexe essas instrues ao dispositivo quando o transferir a outros No use este dispositivo se os requisitos operacionais descritos aqui usurios. no forem atendidos. Instrues Operacionais Transmita, no mximo, 50% do tempo. Para transmitir (falar), pressione o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk, apertar para falar). Transmitir mais de 50% do tempo pode fazer que os requisitos de conformidade de exposio RF sejam excedidos. Segure o rdio em posio vertical em frente ao rosto com o microfone (e outras partes do rdio incluindo a antena) a pelo menos 2,5 cm (1 polegada) de distncia do nariz ou dos lbios. A antena deve ficar longe dos olhos. Ao usar o rdio junto ao corpo, sempre o coloque em um prendedor, suporte, suporte para cinto ou estojo para este produto aprovado pela Motorola Solutions. NO segure a antena enquanto o rdio estiver transmitindo. NO utilize um rdio porttil com antena danificada. Se a antena danificada entrar em contato com sua pele, poder causar uma queimadura leve. Para garantir constantemente a conformidade com os limites aplicveis de exposio RF, use apenas antenas, baterias e acessrios de reposio aprovados ou fornecidos pela Motorola Solutions. 1 Portugus (Brasil) Para obter uma lista dos acessrios aprovados pela Motorola Solutions, consulte o manual do usurio ou acesse www.motorolasolutions.com Segurana Acstica A exposio a rudos muito altos de qualquer origem por longos perodos pode prejudicar sua audio temporria ou permanentemente. Quanto maior for o volume do rdio, mais cedo sua audio ser prejudicada. s vezes, os danos auditivos causados por rudos fortes no so detectados em sua fase inicial, e podem ter efeito cumulativo. Para proteger sua audio:

Use o volume mais baixo necessrio para a execuo da sua tarefa. Aumente o volume somente se estiver em ambientes barulhentos. Reduza o volume antes de conectar o headset ou o fone de ouvido. Limite o tempo de uso dos fones auriculares ou fones de ouvido com volume alto. Ao utilizar o rdio sem monofones ou fones de ouvido, no coloque o alto-falante do rdio diretamente em contato com seus ouvidos. Equipamentos Mdicos Se voc usa um dispositivo mdico pessoal, como um marca-passo ou aparelho auditivo, consulte o fabricante do dispositivo para determinar se est adequadamente protegido contra energia de RF. Seu mdico pode ajud-lo a obter essas informaes. Coldre magntico Alguns coldres da Motorola Solutions contm ms fortes e de neodmio. Se voc usa um dispositivo mdico pessoal, como um marca-passo ou aparelho auditivo, consulte o fabricante do dispositivo para determinar se ele pode ser usado prximo de ms. Seu mdico pode ajud-lo a obter essas informaes. Tambm esteja ciente de que os ms podem danificar outros produtos, incluindo telefones celulares, computadores, discos rgidos e outros dispositivos eletrnicos, bem como cartes de crdito e de mdia magntica. Mantenha o coldre longe de qualquer dispositivo mecnico que pode ser afetado por um campo magntico. Consulte o fabricante do seu produto para determinar se o seu dispositivo ou produto pode ser usado prximo de ms. 2 Aviso aos Usurios (FCC) Este dispositivo est em conformidade com a parte 15 das normas da FCC, de acordo com as seguintes condies:

Este dispositivo no pode causar interferncias prejudiciais sade. O dispositivo deve aceitar qualquer interferncia recebida, inclusive as que possam causar operao indesejvel do dispositivo. Alteraes ou modificaes feitas neste dispositivo, que no sejam expressamente aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions, podero anular o direito do usurio de operar o equipamento. Avisos Operacionais A seguir so explicados os avisos operacionais:

Para Veculos Equipados com Air Bags Ambientes Potencialmente Explosivos Aviso:

Consulte o manual do fabricante do veculo antes de instalar equipamentos eletrnicos para evitar interferncia com o funcionamento do air bag. NO coloque um rdio porttil na rea sobre um air bag ou na rea de liberao do air bag. Os air bags inflam com muita fora. Se um rdio porttil estiver colocado na rea de liberao do air bag e o air bag inflar, o rdio poder ser impelido com grande fora e causar srios ferimentos aos ocupantes do veculo. Aviso:

No transporte um rdio que no seja certificado para locais de risco em ambientes potencialmente explosivos. Isso pode resultar em ferimentos graves ou morte. Voc deve usar apenas um rdio certificado para locais de risco em ambientes potencialmente explosivos. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos referem-se a locais classificados como de risco que podem conter gases, vapores ou ps nocivos, como reas de abastecimento embaixo do convs principal em barcos, instalaes de armazenamento ou transferncia de produtos qumicos ou combustvel e reas onde o ar contm partculas ou elementos qumicos, como fibras, poeira ou ps metlicos. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos so frequentes, mas nem sempre h avisos sobre isso. NO remova, instale ou carregue baterias nessas reas, nem remova ou instale antenas. Fascas em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo podem causar uma exploso ou incndio que pode resultar em ferimentos e, at mesmo, morte. Reparo reas e Equipamentos para Detonao Aviso: Para evitar possveis interferncias em operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo a detonadores eltricos, reas de detonao ou reas onde haja avisos tais como: Desligue rdios bidirecionais. Obedea a todas as sinalizaes e instrues. Baterias Ateno: Use somente baterias aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions. Se a bateria for substituda por uma de tipo incorreto, haver risco de exploso. Sempre carregue a bateria usando o carregador aprovado pela Motorola Solutions. e de fcil acesso. Conecte o carregador/a fonte de alimentao a uma tomada prxima Use a bateria de acordo com sua classificao de Proteo contra entrada (IP) de p e gua. No descarte a bateria no fogo. No troque a bateria em lugares identificados como "Atmosferas Potencialmente Perigosas". No desmonte, comprima, perfure, fragmente ou tente, de outras maneiras, alterar a forma da bateria. No seque baterias molhadas nem midas usando aparelhos ou fontes de calor, como secadores de cabelo ou fornos de micro-ondas. No permita que materiais condutores como joias, chaves ou correntes toquem os terminais expostos da bateria. No descarte baterias no lixo domstico. Portugus (Brasil) Aviso:

Reparos em rdios intrinsecamente seguros da Motorola Solutions certificados, por exemplo, por FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC, devem ser feitos apenas em um local que passou por auditoria de acordo com as normas de reparo e manuteno dos rgos certificadores. Entre em contato com a Motorola Solutions para obter assistncia sobre reparos e servios em equipamentos Motorola Solutions intrinsecamente seguros. Um reparo constitui algo sendo feito internamente na unidade que a retornar as suas condies originais. Os itens que no so considerados como reparos so os em que a ao realizada em uma unidade que no precisa que a parte externa seja aberta para expor os circuitos eltricos internos da unidade. No Substitua Opes ou Acessrios O equipamento de comunicao Motorola Solutions certificado como intrinsecamente seguro pelos rgos de aprovao (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC), testado como um sistema completo que consiste do porttil aprovado, bateria aprovada e acessrios e/ou opes aprovados pelo rgo listado. Essa combinao de porttil e bateria aprovada deve ser estritamente observada. No pode haver substituio de itens, mesmo se o substituto tiver sido aprovado previamente com um equipamento de comunicaes Motorola Solutions diferente. As configuraes aprovadas so listadas pelo rgo Aprovador (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). A Etiqueta de Aprovao de Intrinsecamente Seguro afixada ao rdio refere-se classificao de intrinsecamente seguro do rdio e da bateria aprovada que pode ser usada com o sistema. O PN manual referenciado na Etiqueta de Aprovao de Intrinsecamente Seguro identifica os acessrios ou opes aprovados que podem ser usados com a unidade de rdio porttil. O uso de uma bateria e/ou acessrio intrinsecamente seguro no Motorola Solutions com a unidade de rdio aprovada pela Motorola Solutions invalidar a aprovao de segurana intrnseca da unidade de rdio. 3 Portugus (Brasil) Diretiva de Resduos de Equipamentos Eltricos e Eletrnicos (WEEE) para a Unio Europeia (UE) A Diretiva de WEEE da Unio Europeia exige que os produtos vendidos nos pases da UE tenham a etiqueta de lixeira riscada no produto (ou no pacote, em alguns casos). Conforme definido pela diretiva WEEE, essa etiqueta de lixeira cruzada indica que os clientes e os usurios nos pases da UE no devem descartar equipamentos ou acessrios eltricos ou eletrnicos em lixo domstico. Os clientes ou os usurios nos pases da UE devem entrar em contato com o representante local do fornecedor do equipamento ou com a central de servios para obter informaes sobre o sistema de coleta de lixo em seu pas. Para informaes sobre descarte e reciclagem de resduos eletrnicos, baterias e embalagens, por favor, ligue: 0800168272. 4 Notes Cover.fm Page 1 Wednesday, April 24, 2019 12:39 PM MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2004 and 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

*NNTN7223R*

NNTN7223R Printed in

*6881095C98*

6881095C98-LH

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ489FT3848 / IC: 109U-89FT3848

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.1033(c)(11), 2.1033(b)(7) and RSP 100 Annex C and Sec 3) EXHIBIT 1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL See the Attached Photograph or Sketch Bottom of Radio Top of Radio X Back of Radio Back of Radio under Belt Clip In the user manual (Section: XX) LOCATION TYPE X The label is a polyester film laminate with a pressure sensitive adhesive backing. The adhesive is a permanent type acrylic with minimum peel strength of 32 oz/inch. MARKINGS (TEXT) X See the Attached Photograph and Exhibit 3 for the actual location of the FCC/IC label on the device. X Label Attached Below. See Attached Drawing. EXHIBIT 1 SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ489FT3848 / IC: 109U-89FT3848 Figure 1: FCC Label for AAH56JDN9PA3AN /

IC Label for PMUD3254ABCNAA

*** END ***

EXHIBIT 1 SHEET 2 OF 2

 

 

Certification Department Date: 18 August 2020 Subject: Application Authorization for FCC/IC filing To Whom It May Concern:

I hereby authorize Arine Lee to apply, on my behalf, the application for the following FCC/IC ID:

FCC/IC ID: AZ489FT3848 / 109U-89FT3848 Please contact me if there are any questions or issues. Regards, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager Tel: (954) 723 4707 Email: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com ____________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc, 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322

 

 

FCC ID: AZ489FT3848 CONFIDENTIALITY REQUESTED August 18, 2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request for Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ489FT3848 Dear Sir / Madam, Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd is requesting that Exhibit 4 (Circuit Descriptions), Exhibit 5 (Schematic Diagrams), Exhibit 10 (Parts List and Tune Up Procedures), and Exhibit 12 (Operational Description) not be made routinely available for public inspection. Motorola Solutions Inc considers the information in these exhibits to be classified as trade secrets, pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.457(d), 0.459 and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act. Please mark Exhibits 4, 5, 10, and 12 as Confidential. Please contact me if you require any additional information. Sincerely, Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail : arinelee@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ EXHIBIT 13B Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia

 

 

FCC ID: AZ489FT3848 Date: August 18, 2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ489FT3848 Dear Sir/Madam, Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, herein submits application for Certification of the subject transmitter. This transmitter is intended for use in a portable radio application with capabilities for clear and coded communications with a variable transmit power operating within the following frequency ranges:

Model Numbers Frequency Range RF Power FCC Rules Part XPR 7550 IS AAH56JDN9PA3AN 136-174MHz Rated: 1 5W ;

Max: 6W 22, 74, 80, 90 We are requesting certification under Part(s) of the Commissions Rules listed above to allow operation of this equipment. The subject transmitter complies with Section 90.203 and 80.203(b) of the Rules in that the operator cannot directly program transmit frequencies using the unit's normally accessible external controls. A complete Certification application is enclosed. If you require any additional information, please contact me at +604-2240258. Sincerely, Product Name Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail : arinelee@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ EXHIBIT 13A Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia

 

 

FCC ID: AZ489FT3848 August 18, 2020 Authorization & Evaluation Division Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ489FT3848. Dear Sir/Madam:

This transmitter is designed to operate in the following frequency ranges:

Band/Mode VHF Frequency ranges 136 - 174MHz FCC rule parts 22, 74, 80, 90 To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above frequencies range under FCC Rule Parts 22, 74, 80 and 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 22, 74, 80 and 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e) and 80.203(b), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. Part 22 Part 74 Part 80 Part 24D Part 90 Federal Other Regions Frequency Range

(MHz) 136-150.8*

150.8-152.855 152.855-154 154-156.2475 156.2475-157.1875 157.1875-157.45 157.45-161.575 161.575-161.625 161.625-161-775 161.775-161.9625 161.9625-162.025 162.025-162.0375*

162.0375-173.4 173.4-174*

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

* Canada Please contact me if you required any additional information. Sincerely, Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail : arinelee@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ489FT3848 / IC: 109U-89FT3848 EXHIBIT 2 Statement of Certification

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.907, 2.908 and RSP 100 Sec 4) 2.1 Statement of Certification Transceiver type described herein (AZ489FT3848 / 109U-89FT3848) is in compliance with all applicable parts of the FCC rules and ISED RSS standards. Each unit manufactured, imported, or marketed will conform to the samples tested herein, within the statistical variations that can be expected due to high volume production and test measurement error. NAME: ONG KHYE SIANG SIGNATURE:

DATE: 10th July 2020 TITLE: Engineering Manager EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 1 OF 1